JP5867944B1 - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game by making it difficult for a player to misunderstand the result of a variable display. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the main control means determines the determination information stored as the hold storage at the start of the variation display of the identification information, and transmits a start command according to the determination result. And a pre-start processing means for determining the determination information before the start of the variation display of the identification information, and transmitting a pre-start command according to the determination result. When the command is received normally, a variation effect that produces a variation display of the identification information is executed. When the start command is not received normally, the variation display of one or a plurality of identification information based on the pre-start command The first prefetch effect over the variable display of one or a plurality of identification information based on the pre-start command is executed. [Selection] Figure 100

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventional gaming machines, such as pachinko gaming machines, are provided with main control means for controlling the progress of the game and effect control means for controlling the effect of the game based on the command from the main control means, so that the start condition is satisfied. In general, the display means executes a variable display of symbols (identification information), and a special game advantageous to the player can be executed based on the result of the variable display.

  In such a gaming machine, a variation effect for producing a variation display is executed based on a command transmitted from the main control unit to the slave control unit at the start of the variation display, but transmitted from the main control unit. In some cases, when there is an abnormality in the executed command, the variation effect is not executed (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-252284 A

  By the way, in recent gaming machines, the determination information is acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the starting area and stored as a reserved memory for executing the variable display, and the result of determining the reserved memory before the start of the variable display In some cases, the pre-reading effect is executed over one or more varying effects.

  Therefore, when trying to execute a pre-reading effect on a gaming machine as described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is a case where a fluctuating effect is not executed during the execution of the pre-reading effect. May be misleading.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the progress of a game from being misidentified and can improve the interest of the game.

  In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present invention comprises a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and a sub-control means for controlling the effect of the game based on a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine that executes a variable display of identification information (special symbol) based on the result, and can generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the variable information display of the identification information results in a special result, the main control means includes A storage unit for storing determination information based on the establishment of the information and storing the determination information as a storage for executing a variable display of the identification information; and starting the variable display of the identification information with the determination information stored in the storage unit A determination process stored in the hold storage unit and determination information stored in the hold storage unit is determined before the start of variable display of the identification information; Pre-start processing means for performing processing for transmitting a pre-start command according to the determination result, and whether the sub control means has successfully received the start time command transmitted from the main control means. A command determination means for determining a change effect, a change effect execution means for executing a change effect for effecting a change display of the identification information based on the start command received from the main control means, and a reception from the main control means Based on the pre-start command, a pre-reading effect executing unit that executes a pre-reading effect over a variable display of one or a plurality of the identification information, and a hold that performs a hold display according to the number of determination information stored in the storage unit Display means, and the prefetching effect is executed by changing a display mode of the hold display and the first prefetching effect executed in the variation effect. The variation effect execution means is configured not to execute the variation effect when the command determination means determines that the command at the start is not normally received, The pre-reading effect execution means executes the first pre-reading effect during the variation display of the identification information when the variation effect is not performed during the variation display of the identification information to be executed of the first pre-reading effect. Without executing the second pre-reading effect during the variation display of the identification information, even if the variation effect is not performed during the variation display of the identification information to be executed of the second pre-reading effect. It is characterized by.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to make it difficult to misunderstand the progress of a game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a fragmentary perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram of a control means. (A-1) is a diagram representing a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol, (a-2) is a diagram representing a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol, and (b) is a diagram representing a reach determination table. . (A) is a figure showing the special symbol determination table for jackpot winning, (b) is a figure showing the special symbol determination table for losers. (A) is a figure showing a big hit game control table, (b) is a figure showing a long winning game big prize opening / closing control table, and (c) is a figure showing a short winning game big prize opening / closing control table. (A) is a figure showing a game condition data determination table, (b) is a figure showing a game condition determination table. It is a figure showing the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table in a non-time-short game state. It is a figure showing the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table in a time-short game state. (A) is a diagram showing a normal symbol hit determination table, (b) is a diagram showing a normal symbol determination table, (c) is a diagram showing a general variation pattern determination table, (d) is an auxiliary game reference data determination The figure showing a table, (e) is a figure showing an auxiliary | assistant game control table, (f) is a figure showing a 2nd starting port opening / closing control table. (A) is a diagram showing the configuration of the special symbol reserve storage area of the main RAM, (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special symbol reserve storage area, (c) is the normal symbol reserve storage area of the main RAM The figure showing a structure is a figure showing the structure of each memory | storage part of a normal symbol holding | maintenance storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st starting port detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start port detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the winning gate detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory | storage determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game end process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the common figure normal power control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol memory | storage determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol stop process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the auxiliary | assistant game process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows to the middle of the command analysis process in an effect control board. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the command analysis processing of FIG. 34. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding information update process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows to the middle of the process at the time of a start opening prize in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of a start opening prize of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the icon display mode scenario determination process for the turning effect non-execution in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the game state designation | designated command analysis process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol designation | designated command analysis process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern designation | designated command analysis process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol stop display pattern determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the change effect pattern determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch zone effect start determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the icon change notice determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the production mode setting process in a production control board. It is a flowchart which shows the usual drawing effect execution determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the long open effect execution determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the common figure system effect control process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the usual drawing effect control process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot winning suggestion effect execution determination processing in the effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the long open effect control process in an effect control board. (A) is a figure showing the structure of the production | presentation information storage area | region of sub RAM102c, (b) is a figure showing the structure of each memory | storage part of an production | presentation information storage area. It is a figure showing an example of a prefetch zone production scenario judgment table. It is a figure showing an example of the last number determination table. It is a figure showing an example of a sign effect scenario determination table. It is a figure showing an example of the icon display mode scenario determination table for prefetch zone production execution. It is a figure showing an example of a handshake meeting notice execution determination table. It is a figure showing an example of the icon final display mode determination table for handshake meeting notice. It is a figure showing an example of the dialog count determination table for handshake meeting notice. It is a figure showing an example of the icon display mode scenario determination TBL determination table for handshake meeting notice. It is a figure showing an example of the icon display mode scenario determination table for handshake meeting notice. It is a figure showing an example of the normal icon last display mode determination table. It is a figure showing an example of the icon display mode scenario determination table for normal use. (A) is a figure showing an example of the 1st execution condition judgment table, (b) is a figure showing an example of the 2nd execution condition judgment table. (A) is a figure showing an example of the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table for effect mode A, (b) is a figure showing an example of the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table for zone turning effects. It is a figure showing an example of the variation production pattern determination table of the production mode A. It is a figure showing an example of a production mode determination table. (A) is a figure showing an example of a general drawing effect execution determination table, (b) is a figure showing an example of a general drawing effect pattern determination table, (c) is a figure showing an example of a jackpot winning suggestion effect execution determination table. . It is a figure showing the production flow of handshake meeting notice. It is a figure showing the production flow of a throwing kiss notice. (A-1) is a time chart for explaining the zone-flowing effect and the pre-reading zone effect production flow (when the zone-making effect is executed with a 4-second variation effect), and (a-2) is the zone turning effect and the look-ahead. A time chart for explaining the zone production effect flow (when the zone production effect is executed with a variation effect of 8 seconds), (b-1) is a display mode of the effect pattern in the zone production success production (4 seconds of variation production) (B-2) is a time chart for explaining an example of the display pattern of the effect pattern in zone failure failure production 1 (zone change failure production 1 is a variation effect of 4 seconds). (C-1) is the relationship between the stop of special symbols and the change in the display mode of the icon (4 seconds variation effect is the execution of the zone-successful success effect) (C-2) is for explaining the relationship between the stop of the special symbol and the change of the display mode of the icon (when the zone turning failure effect 1 is executed with a variation effect of 4 seconds). It is a time chart. It is a figure explaining the normal mode which is a display mode of an icon, the 1st special mode, and the 2nd special mode. It is a figure explaining the 3rd special modes 11-35 which are the display modes of an icon. It is a figure explaining the 3rd special modes 41-65 which are the display modes of an icon. It is a figure explaining the 4th special modes 11-24, 31, and 41 which are the display modes of an icon. It is a figure showing the mode of generation | occurrence | production, a shift, and disappearance of a pending | holding icon and the icon during a fluctuation | variation. It is a figure showing a mode before handshake meeting notice occurs. (A) is a figure showing a state in which the hold icon subject to the handshake meeting notice is displayed in the third special mode 11, and (b) is the hold icon displayed before the hold icon subject to the handshake meeting notice. (C) is a diagram showing the appearance of the handshake meeting venue related to the handshake meeting notice, (d) is a handshake character and escort relating to the handshake meeting notice. It is a figure showing a mode that the character appeared. It is a figure showing a mode that the hold icon used as the object of handshake meeting notice is waiting. It is a figure showing a mode that the hold icon used as the object of handshake meeting notice is waiting. It is a figure showing a mode that the handshake meeting notice is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that the handshake meeting notice is performed. (A) is a figure showing a state immediately before the handshake meeting notice ends, and (b) and (c) are figures showing a state after the handshake meeting notice is finished. It is a figure showing a mode that the change production corresponding to the hold icon before the hold icon used as the object of handshake meeting notice is not performed. It is a figure showing a mode that a handshake meeting notice is not performed by the fluctuating presentation corresponding to the hold icon used as the object of a handshake meeting notice not being performed. It is a figure showing a mode that a hold icon changes from the normal mode to the 2nd special mode. (A) is a diagram showing the state before the throwing kiss notice is performed, (b) is a diagram showing the appearance of the character related to the throwing kiss notice, and (c) is the character relating to the throwing kiss notice targeting the heart. It is a figure showing a mode that it flew toward the icon. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which a heart hits an icon subject to a throwing kiss notice, and (b) is a state in which the display mode of the icon is changed by the throwing kiss notice and the change is being notified. FIG. 9C is a diagram illustrating a state after the throwing kiss notice ends. It is a figure showing a mode that the throwing kiss notice is not performed by not performing the variation production corresponding to the hold icon used as the object of the throwing kiss notice. (A) is a diagram showing the state before the throwing kiss notice is performed, (b) is a diagram showing the appearance of the character related to the throwing kiss notice, and (c) is the character relating to the throwing kiss notice targeting the heart. It is a figure showing a mode that it flew toward the icon. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which a heart hits an icon subject to a throwing kiss notice, and (b) is a state in which the display mode of the icon is changed by the throwing kiss notice and the change is being notified. FIG. 9C is a diagram illustrating a state after the throwing kiss notice ends. (A) And (b) is a figure showing a state before the zone precursor effect is executed, and (c) and (d) are states in which the zone indicator effect is executed according to the third special mode 41 of the icon display mode. FIG. (A) And (b) is a figure showing a mode that the zone display effect by the display mode of an icon by the 3rd special mode 4 is performed, (c) is the 3rd special mode 5 and the 3rd special mode of the icon display mode. It is a figure showing a mode that the zone precursor effect by the aspect 2 (prefetch zone effect indication aspect) is performed. (A) is a figure showing a state in which the pre-reading symbols constituting the zone turning effect are pseudo-stopped while the zone indication effect is executed in the third special mode 2 (pre-reading zone effect suggesting mode). In (b), the zone sign effect is executed in accordance with the third special mode 2 (pre-read zone effect suggesting mode) as the icon display mode, and the pre-read symbols and zone symbols constituting the zone turn effect are pseudo-stopped. A diagram showing the state, (c) is a pre-sign symbol, zone symbol, and rush that make up the zone-striking effect while the zone sign effect is executed in the third special mode 2 (pre-read zone effect suggestion mode). It is a figure showing a mode that the design is carrying out the pseudo stop. (A) The zone display effect is executed in the third special mode 2 (pre-read zone effect suggestion mode), and the pre-read symbol, zone symbol, and inrush symbol constituting the zone turn effect are stopped. FIGS. 5B and 5C show the state in which the icon is displayed in the third special mode 3 (the pre-read zone notification effect mode) and the pre-reading zone indicates that the zone is in the pre-read zone. It is a figure showing a mode that the zone background image is displayed. It is a figure showing a mode that the pre-reading zone background image which shows that it is a prefetching zone is displayed while the zone alerting | reporting effect by the 3rd special mode 3 (prefetching zone effect alerting | reporting aspect) is performed as the display mode of an icon. . (A) is a figure showing a state in which a zone notification effect is displayed in the third special mode 3 (prefetch zone effect notification mode), and (b) is a jackpot winning notification in the icon display mode. It is a figure showing a mode that it is. It is a figure showing a mode that a prefetch zone production is not performed (a prefetch zone background image is no longer displayed) by not performing the variation production corresponding to the hold icon before the hold icon used as the object of prefetch zone production. It is a figure showing a mode that prefetch zone production is performed (prefetch zone background image is displayed) by performing change production corresponding to the hold icon used as the object of prefetch zone production. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the execution timing of a common figure system production and a special figure system production. (A) is a figure showing an example immediately after the start of a general drawing effect, (b) is a figure showing an example immediately after the start of the fluctuation display (derivative display) of the special effect symbol in a general drawing effect. It is a figure showing an example of the change display (derivative display) of the special effect design in the usual drawing effect. It is a figure showing an example of the stop display (notification display) of the special effect design in a usual drawing effect. It is a figure showing an example of the stop display (notification display) of the special effect design in a usual drawing effect. It is a figure showing an example of a long open effect. It is a figure showing a mode that the fluctuating effect corresponding to a holding | maintenance icon is not performed. It is a figure showing a mode that the variation effect (derivative display) of the special effect design in a usual drawing effect is performed, while the variation effect corresponding to a hold icon is not performed. It is a figure showing a mode that the special effect design in the usual drawing effect performed while the change effect corresponding to a hold icon is not performed stops (indication display). It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern designation | designated command analysis process in the presentation control board of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure showing a mode that the pending | holding icon which should change to the 2nd special aspect 13 by the variation | change effect corresponding to a pending | holding icon not changing from the normal aspect to the 2nd special aspect 13 is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that the icon which did not change from the normal mode to the 2nd special mode 13 by changing execution is not changed, but changes to the 2nd special mode 14 according to a scenario by execution of changing production. It is a figure showing a mode that the icon was returned to the normal mode by not performing the change production corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the 2nd special mode 13, and the throwing kiss notice is no longer executed. The state in which the pre-read zone effect is interrupted and the display mode of the icon is returned to the normal mode by not executing the fluctuating effect corresponding to the icon in front of the icon of the third special mode 3 (pre-read zone effect notification mode). FIG. When the variation effect corresponding to the icon of the third special mode 3 (prefetch zone effect notification mode) is executed, the prefetch zone effect is resumed (the prefetch zone background image is displayed), and the icon returned to the normal mode is displayed. It is a figure showing a mode that it returns to a special mode according to a scenario by execution of a change production. It is a flowchart which shows the first half part of the command analysis process in the presentation control board of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure showing a mode that the change effect corresponding to the hold | maintenance icon currently displayed by the 2nd special aspect 13 is not performed, but an icon change notice is performed according to a scenario. It is a figure showing a mode that the variation production corresponding to the icon displayed by the 2nd special mode 14 is not performed, but a throwing kiss notice is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that the pre-reading zone production is performed although the change production corresponding to the icon before the icon of the 3rd special mode 3 (pre-reading zone production notification mode) is not performed.

(First embodiment)
The first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine Y is formed with a gaming board mounting frame Y1, a glass door Y2 supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the gaming board mounting frame Y1, and a gaming area 2A in which gaming balls flow down. And a game board 2.

  The game board mounting frame Y1 is rotatably supported by an outer frame (not shown) fixed to the island facility of the game store, and is detachably mounted.

  The glass door Y2 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame Y1 via a hinge mechanism portion H at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is supported rotatably about the hinge mechanism portion H as a fulcrum. Therefore, by rotating the glass door Y2 like a door around the hinge mechanism H as a fulcrum, the game area 2A and the front portion of the game board mounting frame Y1 can be opened and closed. The glass door Y2 covers the front portion of the game area 2A so as to be visible with glass (transparent member) attached from the back side to a window provided in the center.

  A lock mechanism R that fixes the glass door Y2 to the game board mounting frame Y1 is provided on the other end side of the glass door Y2. The fixing by the lock mechanism R can be released by a dedicated key.

  The glass door Y <b> 2 is provided with a receiving tray 50 that stores a plurality of game balls and a firing operation device 3 that can perform an operation for firing the game balls. The launch operation device 3 is connected to a game ball launch device (not shown) that can launch a game ball toward the game area 2A. The game ball launcher is provided on the front surface of the game board mounting frame Y1. The game balls stored in the tray 50 are supplied to the game ball launcher.

  The firing operation device 3 includes a base 31 fixed to the glass door Y2, and a launch handle 32 that is rotatably provided on the base 31. The game ball launcher launches a game ball with a strength (hereinafter referred to as “game ball launch strength”) according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 32.

  In the game area 2A of the game board 2, a frame-shaped decorative frame 29A, an inner rail member 29B having a curved shape, an outer rail member 29C, and a special winning opening 8, which will be described later, are arranged and a game ball is placed. A guidance member 29 </ b> D having a guidance path that can be guided to the second starting port 7 formed on the upper surface is provided.

  The decorative frame 29 </ b> A is fitted into the approximate center of the game board 2. An image display device 14 composed of a liquid crystal display is fitted inside the decorative frame 29A. Further, an effect accessory device 17 is provided at the inner end of the decorative frame 29A.

  The inner rail member 29B is disposed outside the decorative frame 29A, and the outer rail member 29C is disposed outside the inner rail member 29B. A game ball fired with a predetermined game ball launch strength rises between the inner rail member 29B and the outer rail member 29C and enters the game area 2A. In the game area 2A, a plurality of nails and windmills are provided. A game ball that has entered the game area 2A can flow down in various directions by a plurality of nails and windmills.

  In the game area 2A, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning awards 11 are provided. Each general winning opening 11 is provided with a general winning opening detecting sensor 11a. When the general winning opening detecting sensor 11a detects a gaming ball, a predetermined number (for example, ten) of gaming balls are paid out as winning balls. (A game value is given).

  In addition, a winning gate 10 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the lower right side of the decorative frame 29A in the game area 2A. The winning gate 10 is provided with a winning gate detection sensor 10a for detecting a game ball. A normal symbol lottery is performed on condition that the winning gate detection sensor 10a detects a game ball. The normal symbol lottery will be described later.

  A first start port 6 is provided below the image display device 14 at the lower part of the game area 2A and is invariable and can always enter the ball. The first start port 6 is provided with a first start port detection sensor 6a for detecting a game ball. A first special symbol lottery is performed on condition that the first start port detection sensor 6a detects a game ball. The first special symbol lottery will be described later. When the first start port detection sensor 6a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as award balls (a game value is given).

  A variable second start port 7 is provided immediately below the first start port 6. The second start port 7 is controlled by the second start port control device 70 to either a basic mode (closed mode) incapable of winning a prize or a special mode (open mode) of winning. The second start port 7 is also provided with a second start port detection sensor 7a for detecting a game ball. A second special symbol lottery is performed on condition that the second start port detection sensor 7a detects a game ball. The second special symbol lottery will be described later. When the second start port detection sensor 7a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as award balls (a game value is given).

  The second start port control device 70 includes a rotatable normal movable piece 70A and a second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B as a drive unit for rotating the normal movable piece 70A.

  The normal movable piece 70A is composed of a rectangular door member. Normally, the movable piece 70A stops in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A (except when a predetermined condition is satisfied), and the second start port 7 is opened. It is closed. The closing of the second starting port 7 by the ordinary movable piece 70 </ b> A constitutes a basic mode of the second starting port 7.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the normal movable piece 70A is rotated forward about the rotation shaft formed at the lower end portion to open the second start port 7. The second start port 7 is controlled to a special mode that allows the ball to enter. The opening of the second starting port 7 by the ordinary movable piece 70 </ b> A constitutes a special mode of the second starting port 7. When the second starting port 7 is opened, the normal movable piece 70A protrudes from the game area 2A, and can receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the second starting port 7.

  Note that the predetermined condition for the second start-up port control device 70 is that the normal symbol lottery described above is determined as the winning normal symbol.

  On the downstream side of the winning gate 10, a variable large winning opening 8 is provided. The special winning opening 8 is controlled by the special winning opening control device 80 to either a basic mode in which no winning is possible or a special mode in which a winning is possible. The big winning opening 8 is provided with a big winning opening detecting sensor 8a for detecting a game ball. When the special winning opening detection sensor 8a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball (a game value is given).

  The special prize opening control device 80 includes a rotatable special movable piece 80A and a special prize opening opening / closing solenoid 80B as a drive unit for rotating the special movable piece 80A.

  The special movable piece 80A is composed of a rectangular door member. Normally, the special movable piece 80A stops in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A (except when a predetermined condition is satisfied), and the special winning opening 8 is closed. doing. The closing of the special prize opening 8 by the special movable piece 80 </ b> A constitutes the basic mode of the special prize opening 8.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special movable piece 80A is rotated forward about the rotation shaft formed at the lower end portion to open the special winning opening 8. The special winning opening 8 is controlled to a special mode in which a ball can be entered. Opening of the special winning opening 8 by the special movable piece 80A constitutes a special mode of the special winning opening 8. When the special winning piece 80A is opened, the special movable piece 80A protrudes from the game area 2A and can receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the special winning opening 8.

  The predetermined condition for the special winning opening control device 80 is the above-described first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery (hereinafter, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are collectively referred to as “special symbol lottery”). In other words, the jackpot special symbol or the jackpot special symbol is determined.

  On the surface of the game board 2 and below the game area 2A, a symbol display device comprising a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21 and a normal symbol display device 22, and a first special symbol hold A hold display device including a display device 23, a second special symbol hold display device 24, and a normal symbol hold display device 25 is provided.

  The first special symbol display device 20 is a variable display device that displays the result of the first special symbol lottery performed on condition that a game ball enters the first start port 6, and the second special symbol display device 21 is This is a variable display device that displays the result of the second special symbol lottery performed on condition that a game ball enters the second starting port 7.

  In the first special symbol lottery, a big hit determination random number value is acquired when a game ball enters the first start port 6, and the acquired big hit determination random number value is a random value corresponding to “big hit” Determining whether or not. In the second special symbol lottery, whether a big hit determination random number value is acquired when a game ball enters the second starting port 7, and the acquired big hit determination random number value is a random value corresponding to “big hit” Determining whether or not.

  When the first special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol display device 20 displays a variation of the special symbol based on the lottery result, and displays the first special symbol lottery representing the result of the first special symbol lottery. Stop display is performed. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20 is a notification of the lottery result. The same applies to the second special symbol lottery and the second special symbol display device 21.

  For example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 each include a plurality of LEDs arranged in a line. In the variation display of each special symbol, for example, a predetermined LED of the corresponding first special symbol display device 20 or second special symbol display device 21 moves and blinks at a predetermined interval. In the special symbol stop display, a specific LED indicating the result of each special symbol lottery is lit.

  The normal symbol display device 22 is a variable display device that displays the result of the normal symbol lottery performed on condition that the game ball passes the winning gate 10. The normal symbol lottery is a process of acquiring a random number value for winning determination when the game ball passes the winning gate 10 and determining whether or not the acquired random number value for winning determination is a random value corresponding to “win”. I mean.

  When the normal symbol lottery is performed, the normal symbol display device 22 displays the variation of the normal symbol based on the lottery result, and the stop display of the normal symbol representing the result of the normal symbol lottery is performed. That is, the normal symbol stop display on the normal symbol display device 22 is a notification of the lottery result.

  For example, each of the normal symbol display devices 22 includes a plurality of LEDs. In the normal symbol variation display, for example, a predetermined LED of the normal symbol display device 22 blinks at a predetermined interval. And in the stop display of a normal symbol, specific LED showing the result of a normal symbol lottery lights.

  By the way, during the special symbol variation display or during the special game in which the special winning opening control device 80 is operated, even if a game ball enters the start ports 6 and 7, the special symbol variation display is immediately performed and the special symbol variation display is performed. The result of the symbol lottery is not notified. That is, the special symbol variation display may be suspended under certain conditions. In the present embodiment, as a fixed condition, an upper limit is set for the number of special symbols that can be suspended. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value is set to “4” for each of the start ports 6 and 7. That is, it is possible to hold up to four rights to execute the special symbol variation display for each of the start ports 6 and 7.

  The first special symbol hold display device 23 displays the hold number (U1: hereinafter referred to as “first special figure hold number”) of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “first special figure change display”). To do. The second special symbol hold display device 24 displays the hold number (U2: hereinafter referred to as “second special figure hold number”) of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “second special figure change display”). To do. The first special symbol hold display device 23 and the second special symbol hold display device 24 include, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and turn on a predetermined LED according to the number of holds.

  Similarly, for the variable symbol display (hereinafter referred to as “general variable display”), the upper limit reserved number is set to four, and the reserved number (G: hereinafter referred to as “general map reserved number”). ) Is displayed on the normal symbol hold display device 25. The normal symbol hold display device 25 includes, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and lights a predetermined LED according to the number of hold of the normal symbols.

  In addition, the gaming machine Y is provided with an effect device for executing various effects. In the present embodiment, the effect device includes an image display device 14, an audio output device 15, an effect lighting device 16, and an effect accessory device 17. An image display device 14 and an effect accessory device 17 are provided on the game board 2, and an audio output device 15 and an effect lighting device 16 are provided on the glass door Y2.

  The image display device 14 performs various effects by displaying various still images and moving images. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display is used as the image display device 14, but other types of display devices such as a plasma display and an organic EL display can also be used.

  The effect accessory device 17 includes a movable part 17A, and operates the movable part 17A to perform an effect by operation. The audio output device 15 produces a sound effect by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like. The effect lighting device 16 performs an effect by illumination by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp.

  The saucer 50 is provided with an effect button device 18 and a selection button device 19 that function as input devices for performing operations related to various effects described later.

  The effect button device 18 includes an effect button 18A that can be operated and an effect button detection switch 18a that is connected to the effect button 18A and detects an operation on the effect button 18A (see FIG. 2).

  The selection button device 19 is connected to an operable selection button 19A and a selection button 19A, and includes a selection button detection switch 19a that detects an operation on the selection button 19A (see FIG. 2).

  The selection button 19A includes an upper button 191A, a left button 192A, a lower button 193A, and a right button 194A. Each button 191 </ b> A to 194 </ b> A is provided so as to be pressed in a state of protruding from the tray 50.

  The effect device performs various effects according to the progress (state) of the game. As an effect, for example, there is a special drawing lottery effect that is performed in response to the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. The special drawing lottery effect is performed in the image display device 14. In the special drawing lottery effect, a change display of the effect symbol and a stop display of the effect symbol are performed.

  The variation display of the effect symbol is performed corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect symbol varies for a predetermined time in a predetermined manner. The stop display of the effect symbol is performed corresponding to the stop display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “effect symbol display” when the change display and stop display of the effect symbol are collectively referred to). In the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect symbol is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined manner representing the result of the special symbol lottery.

  The effect symbols are, for example, three rows of decorative symbols arranged in the left region, the central region, and the right region of the display unit 140 such as the image display device 14 (for example, decorative symbols representing numbers from “1” to “9”). ). In the variation display of the effect symbols, the decorative symbols in each row move from the top to the bottom (variable display) as if the reels are rotating. Note that the variation display mode of the effect symbol is not limited to this. In addition, during the variation display of the effect symbols, various effect images such as background images and object images such as characters, movies, and the like are displayed according to the result of the special symbol lottery.

  On the other hand, in the stop display of effect symbols, the above three rows of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left area, the center area, and the right area of the display unit 140 such as the image display device 14. The arrangement of the decorative symbols on a predetermined effective line (for example, the central horizontal line in the display unit 140) when the effect symbols are stopped and displayed represents the result of the special symbol lottery.

  In addition to the special drawing lottery effect, a special game effect performed when the jackpot game is executed, and an internal standby state in which the special symbol variation display or special game is not performed for a predetermined period of time (so-called customer waiting state) Various performances such as demonstration performances are performed.

  On the back of the game board 2 and the glass door Y2, there are a main control board 101 for performing various controls relating to the game, an effect control board 102, a payout control board 103, a lamp control board 104, an image control board 105, a power supply board 107, a game An information output terminal board 108 is provided.

(Internal configuration of gaming machine Y)
Next, the internal configuration of the gaming machine Y will be described with reference to FIG.

  The power supply board 107 is provided with a backup power supply composed of a capacitor, supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine Y, monitors a power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine Y, and when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less, An interruption detection signal is output to the main control board 101. When the power interruption detection signal becomes high level, the main CPU 101a becomes operable, and when the power interruption detection signal becomes low level, the main CPU 101a becomes inactive state. The backup power source is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery, for example, or a capacitor and a battery may be used in combination.

  The main control board 101 controls the basic operation of the game. The main control board 101 includes a main CPU 101a, a main ROM 101b, and a main RAM 101c. The main CPU 101a reads out a program stored in the main ROM 101b based on input signals from various detection sensors, timers (quartz crystal units) and the like, performs arithmetic processing related to the game, and directly controls various control devices and display devices. Then, a predetermined command or the like based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the effect control board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like. The main RAM 101c functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the main CPU 101a.

  On the input side of the main control board 101, a first starting port detection sensor 6a, a second starting port detection sensor 7a, a big winning port detection sensor 8a, and a winning gate detection sensor 10a are connected via an input port (not shown). And the general winning a prize mouth detection sensor 11a is connected. Each detection sensor outputs a detection signal to the main control board 101 when detecting a game ball.

  On the output side of the main control board 101, via an output port (not shown), a second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B for operating the normal movable piece 70A of the second start port control device 70, and a prize winning port control. A special prize opening / closing solenoid 80B for operating the special movable piece 80A of the device 80 is connected. The main control board 101 outputs a control signal for controlling each solenoid to the second start opening / closing solenoid 70B and the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B.

  Further, on the output side of the main control board 101, a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, and a first special symbol hold are provided via an output port (not shown). A display device 23, a second special symbol hold display device 24, and a normal symbol hold display device 25 are connected. The main control board 101 outputs a display control signal for controlling each display device to each display device 20-25.

  Furthermore, a game information output terminal board 108 is connected to the output side of the main control board 101 via an output port (not shown). The main control board 101 outputs information relating to a predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as game information) to the game information output terminal board 108 as an external signal.

  A game information display device is connected to the game information output terminal board 108. The game information output terminal board 108 outputs an external signal to the game information display device and the hall computer. The game information display device is provided on the gaming machine Y, and can display predetermined game information based on the predetermined game information (external signal).

  The effect control board 102 includes a sub CPU 102a, a sub ROM 102b, and a sub RAM 102c. The effect control board 102 is connected to the main control board 101 so as to be able to communicate in one direction from the main control board 101 to the effect control board 102. The main control board 101 transmits a predetermined command to the effect control board 102 based on the processing related to the game, and the effect control board 102 receives the predetermined command.

  An effect button detection switch 18 a and a selection button detection switch 19 a are connected to the input side of the effect control board 102 via the lamp control board 104.

  When the effect button 18A is operated, the effect button detection switch 18a outputs an effect button detection signal indicating that the operation of the effect button 18A has been performed to the lamp control board 104 to the effect control board 102. When the effect button detection signal is input, the lamp control board 104 outputs the effect control board 102 to the effect control board 102.

  When the selection button 19A is operated, the selection button detection switch 19a outputs a selection button detection signal indicating that the selection button 19A has been operated to the lamp control board 104 to the effect control board 102. When the selection button detection signal is input, the lamp control board 104 outputs it to the effect control board 102.

  The selection button detection switch 19a is connected to the upper button 191A to detect the operation of the upper button 191A, and the left button detection switch 192a is connected to the left button 192A to detect the operation of the left button 192A. The lower button 193A is connected to the lower button 193A to detect the operation of the lower button 193A, and the right button detection switch 194a is connected to the right button 194A to detect the operation of the right button 194A.

  When each button detection switch 191a, 192a, 193a, 194a detects an operation, the upper button detection signal, the left button detection signal, the lower button detection signal, and the right button detection signal are respectively transmitted via the lamp control board 104. To the effect control board 102. The upper button detection signal, the left button detection signal, the lower button detection signal, and the right button detection signal are collectively referred to as a “selection button detection signal”.

  The sub CPU 102a outputs a command output from the main control board 101, an effect button detection signal output from the effect button device 18, a selection button detection signal output from the selection button device 19, and an input signal from a timer (crystal oscillator). Based on the above, the program stored in the sub ROM 102b is read out to perform arithmetic processing, and a command for controlling the effect is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 based on the processing. The sub RAM 102c functions as a data work area when the sub CPU 102a performs arithmetic processing.

  The payout control board 103 performs launch control for launching the game ball and payout control for paying out the game ball to the player. The payout control board 103 includes a payout CPU 103a, a payout ROM 103b, and a payout RAM 103c. The payout control board 103 is connected to the main control board 101 and the power supply board 107 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication.

  A touch sensor 32a and a firing volume knob 32b are connected to the input side of the payout CPU 103a. The touch sensor 32 a is mounted in the firing handle 32. When a player, a store clerk, or the like touches the launch handle 32, the touch sensor 32 a detects that a person has touched the launch handle 32 and transmits a launch handle detection signal to the launch control board 106. The firing volume knob 32 b is connected to the firing handle 32. The firing volume knob 32b rotates in conjunction with the firing handle 32 and detects the rotation angle.

  The payout control board 103 is connected to the firing solenoid 41 via the power supply board 107 on the output side. The payout control board 103 permits energization of the firing solenoid 41 when receiving the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a.

  When the firing handle 32 is operated to change the rotation angle of the firing handle 32, the gear connected to the firing handle 32 rotates and the knob 32b of the firing volume connected to the gear rotates. A voltage corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 32 detected by the firing volume knob 32 b is applied to the firing solenoid 41.

  When a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 41, the firing solenoid 41 operates according to the applied voltage. In this manner, the payout control board 103 controls the energization of the launch solenoid 41 based on the information contained in the launch handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a and the input signal from the launch volume knob 32b, and launches the game ball.

  In the present embodiment, the reciprocating speed of the firing solenoid 41 is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided on the firing control board 106. Since one game ball is fired every time the firing solenoid 41 makes one reciprocation, the number of game balls fired in one minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute).

  Further, a payout drive unit 51 of the payout device 5 for paying out a predetermined number of game balls from a storage tank (not shown) to the player is connected to the output side of the payout control board 103. The payout CPU 103a reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM 103b based on the prize ball request signal transmitted from the main control board 101, performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout device 5 to give a predetermined game ball to the player. Pay out. At this time, the payout RAM 103c functions as a data work area during the calculation process of the payout CPU 103a.

  The lamp control board 104 includes a lamp CPU 104a, a lamp ROM 104b, and a lamp RAM 104c, similarly to the above boards. On the output side of the lamp control board 104, an effect lighting device 16 and an effect accessory device 17 are connected.

  The lamp CPU 104a performs light emission control of the effect lighting device 16 and irradiation of light from the effect lighting device 16 based on a command related to effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102 (hereinafter referred to as “effect control command”). Drive control for the motor for changing the direction is performed. Further, the lamp CPU 104a performs drive control on a solenoid or a motor that operates the effect accessory device 17 based on the effect control command.

  Further, on the input side of the lamp control board 104, an effect button detection switch 18 a of the effect button device 18 and a selection button detection switch 19 a of the selection button device 19 are connected. When the effect button detection signal or the selection button detection signal is input, the lamp control board 104 outputs each to the effect control board 102. That is, the lamp control board 104 relays the effect button detection signal and the selection button detection signal between the effect control board 102, the effect button device 18, and the selection button device 19.

  The image control board 105 generates at least a video signal related to an image such as a moving image or a still image to be displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and outputs the image signal to the image display device 14. A sound generation unit 105C that generates a sound signal related to the sound to be output to the sound output unit 15 and outputs the sound signal to the sound output device 15, and a control unit 105A that controls and controls the image generation unit 105B and the sound generation unit 105C.

  The overall control unit 105 </ b> A of the image control board 105 includes an overall CPU 105 </ b> Aa, an overall ROM 105 </ b> Ab, and an overall RAM 105 </ b> Ac for performing image display control by the image display device 14.

  The overall CPU 105Aa is connected to an overall ROM 105Ab in which a control program and the like are stored, and a control program necessary for the operation of the overall CPU 105Aa is read out. Upon receiving a command related to effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102, the general CPU 105Aa issues an instruction for an image to be displayed on the image display device 14 on the image generation unit 105B based on the command, and also transmits to the sound generation unit 105C. A voice instruction to be output from the voice output device 15 is issued.

  The general RAM 105Ac functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the general CPU 105Aa, and temporarily stores data read from the general ROM 105Ab.

  The general ROM 105Ab is composed of a mask ROM, a control processing program for the general ROM 105Ab, a display list generation program for generating a display list, an animation pattern for displaying an animation of a production pattern, animation scene information, and the like. Is remembered.

  This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes the specific content of the effect by the image, and the animation pattern is associated with the animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method. Various information such as a duty ratio that is a parameter of the luminance of the image display device 14 is included.

  The image generation unit 105B includes a VDP 105Ba (Video Display Processor) that is an image processor, a CGROM 105Bb that stores image data, a VRAM 105Bc that temporarily stores drawing data generated from the image data, and the like. ing.

  The VDP 105Ba is connected to the CGROM 105Bb in which image data is stored, and generates drawing data as a source of a video signal (RGB signal or the like) based on the image data based on an instruction from the overall CPU 105Aa. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the image display device 14, for example, a material image representing an individual image such as a background image such as a scene, a character, and a dialogue that constitutes a background of a decorative design image or a decorative design. It is data. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame formed by combining (superimposing) individual images.

  The CGROM 105Bb is composed of a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like, and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie), etc., consisting of a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image.

  Further, the CGROM 105Bb stores the palette data in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without being compressed. The CGROM 105Bb may have a configuration in which only a part of the image data is compressed without being compressed. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

  The image generation unit 105B has a crystal oscillator. The crystal oscillator outputs a pulse signal to the VDP 105Ba. The VDP 105Ba divides the pulse signal to generate a synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal / vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the image display device 14, and outputs the synchronization signal to the image display device 14.

  Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 101b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 4A-1 and 4A-2 are diagrams illustrating an example of the jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination constitutes a special symbol lottery and is to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 4A-1 is a table (hereinafter referred to as “first jackpot determination table”) that is referred to in the jackpot determination performed when the game ball enters the first starting port 6 as a trigger. On the other hand, FIG. 4A-2 is a table (hereinafter referred to as “second jackpot determination table”) that is referred to in the jackpot determination performed when the game ball enters the second start port 7 as a trigger.

  In any jackpot determination table, a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as “low probability jackpot determination table”) referred to when the jackpot winning probability described later is relatively low (set to a standard value). And a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as “high probability jackpot determination table”) that is referred to when the state is relatively high (set higher than the standard value).

  In each jackpot determination table, a jackpot determination value and a determination result are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, by matching the jackpot determination random number acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 with the jackpot determination table, "Is determined.

  If the result of the jackpot determination is “big jackpot”, after the special symbol indicating the result is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game with the opening of the jackpot 8 is executed (a game value advantageous to the player is given) ).

  When the result of the big hit determination is “losing”, the reach determination is further performed based on the reach determination table of FIG. In the reach determination table, the reach determination value and the presence / absence of execution of reach production are uniquely associated and stored. As described later, whether or not the reach effect is executed by collating the reach determination random number obtained when the game ball enters the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 with the reach determination table Is determined.

  If the result of the reach determination is “execution of reach production”, the reach production is performed to increase the player's expectation of winning the big hit in the special drawing lottery production. In this embodiment, the probability of being determined as “execution of reach effect” in the reach determination table used in the reach determination executed based on the game ball entering the first start port 6 will be described later. Although it is not divided by the number of first special figure hold, the probability of being determined as “execution of reach production” is divided by the number of first special figure hold and may be different depending on the number of first special figure hold. it can. For example, the probability that the reach determination table used when the first special figure hold number is a first value (for example, the first special figure hold number = 0 to 1) is determined as “execution of reach production” is The probability that one special figure hold number is a second value larger than the first value (for example, the first special figure hold number ≧ 2) is higher than the probability of being determined as “execution of reach effect” in the reach determination table used. Can be. Similarly, the probability of being determined as “execution of reach effect” in the reach determination table used in the reach determination executed based on the game ball entering the second start port 7 is a second characteristic described later. Although it is not divided according to the number of figure hold, the probability of being determined as “execution of reach production” is divided according to the number of second special figure hold and may be different depending on the number of second special figure hold. For example, the probability that the reach determination table used when the second special figure hold number is a third value (for example, the second special figure hold number = 0 to 1) is determined to be “execution of reach effect” is the first 2 The number of special figure reservations is higher than the probability of being determined as “execution of reach production” in the reach determination table used when the fourth value is larger than the third value (for example, the number of second special figure reservations ≧ 2). Can be.

  As the reach effect, for example, the above decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in two areas of the left area, the center area, and the right area of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 during the display of the effect symbols. A part of the symbol is displayed as a pseudo stop), and if a predetermined decorative symbol stops on a predetermined effective line in the remaining one area, a state of a decorative symbol representing a winning jackpot is obtained (so-called “reach state”) There is a reach production where “ If the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the result of the jackpot determination is still “losing” even if this stunning specific state is reached.

  After the reach state occurs in the reach production, there are cases where a specific production (so-called “SP reach” or “SPSP reach”) that increases the expectation of winning a big hit is performed or not. Further, in the reach production, the reach state does not always occur. That is, there is also a reach effect in which a specific effect is performed to increase a player's expectation of winning a big hit without reaching a reach state. In the present embodiment, a reach effect is performed if the result of the jackpot determination is “big hit”. However, the reach determination can be performed even in the case of a big win, and the reach effect can be performed only when the reach determination determines “execution of reach effect”.

  Fig.5 (a)-FIG.5 (b) are figures which show an example of a special symbol determination table. The special symbol determination constitutes a special symbol lottery, and determines the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 (special symbol stop display mode) based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is.

  The special symbol determination table is roughly divided according to the results of the jackpot determination (big hit, small hit and loss). That is, FIG. 5A shows a special symbol determination table for jackpot winning that is referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the jackpot determination is “big hit”, and FIG. 5B shows that the result of the jackpot determination is “ It is a special symbol determination table for losing referred to in the special symbol determination in the case of “losing”.

  Each of these tables is further divided according to the type of start opening (the first start opening 6 or the second start opening 7) in which a game ball was entered as a trigger for the special symbol determination. When the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the special symbol determination table is further divided according to whether or not the reach effect is executed (reach determination result).

  In each special symbol determination table, the special symbol determination value and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the special symbol determination random number acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 is collated with the special symbol determination table to be stopped and displayed. A special symbol is determined. As special symbol identification information to be stopped and displayed, special symbol stop symbol data and effect symbol designation command are set.

  The special figure stop symbol data is used in the process on the main control board 101, and the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in the process on the effect control board 102. The effect designating command is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the special symbol variable display (during the special symbol memory determination process in step S310).

  The effect symbol designation command is a 1-byte MODE data for identifying a special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21) on which the special symbol related to the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. And 1-byte DATA data for identifying a special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

  As for the effect designating command, if the MODE data is “E3H”, it means that the special symbol is stopped on the first special symbol display device 20, and if the MODE data is “E4H”, the second special symbol is displayed. This means that special symbol stop display is performed on the symbol display device 21. The effect designating command with MODE data “E3H” is referred to as “first effect designating command”, and the effect designating command with MODE data “E4H” is referred to as “second effect designating command”.

  FIG. 6A is a diagram illustrating an example of a jackpot game control table used when controlling a jackpot game.

  The jackpot game control table stores conditions for controlling the jackpot game. As conditions for controlling the jackpot game, the opening time, which is the period from the start of the jackpot game until the first opening of the big prize opening 8, and the opening to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening Ending time, which is the period from the end of the last opening of the big winning opening 8 to the end of the jackpot game, and the ending An ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start is set. The conditions for controlling these jackpot games are related to the type of jackpot, that is, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, which control condition is used in the jackpot game is selected based on the type of special symbol.

  FIG. 6B to FIG. 6C are diagrams showing an example of the big prize opening / closing control table used when controlling the opening / closing of the big prize opening 8 in the big hit game. FIG. 6B is a long winning game opening / closing control table for a long hit game that is referred to in the long hit game that constitutes the jackpot game, and FIG. 6C is a short hit game that is referred to in the short hit game that constitutes the jackpot game. This is a prize winning opening / closing control table.

  The big winning opening / closing control table for the big hit game stores conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the big winning opening 8 in the big win game. As conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the big prize opening 8, a special number is a round number (R) which is the number of the round game, and an opening number of the big prize opening 8 (operation of the big prize opening control device 80) in each round game. The operation number (K) and the opening time / closing time (operation time / non-operation time) of the special winning opening 8 are set.

  FIG. 7A is a diagram illustrating an example of a reference data determination table that is referred to when determining game condition data. The game condition data is identification information that represents a state of a game condition that is newly set (changed) after the jackpot game when the jackpot is won. The game condition data is associated with the state of the jackpot winning probability at the time of the special symbol lottery and the result of the special symbol lottery (special symbol stop symbol data). The table is divided according to the status of the jackpot winning probability (low probability gaming state / high probability gaming state). In each divided table, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data), game condition data, Are uniquely associated and stored. The game condition data includes the number of special symbols that can be executed according to the status of the jackpot winning probability newly set by the jackpot winning status, the status of the ease of winning the start opening, and the state of the gaming conditions (Xa, Ja: 3) “01H” to “03H” are set.

  FIG. 7B shows an example of the game condition determination table. The game condition determination is to determine the state of the game condition that is newly set when the jackpot game ends (during the jackpot game end process). As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability and the start opening winning ease are set as the game conditions.

  The table includes special data that can be executed according to the game condition data, the state of each game condition, that is, the ON / OFF of a flag (high probability flag and short time flag) indicating the state of the game condition described later and the state of the game condition. The number of symbol displays (Xa, Ja: hereinafter referred to as “executable number of times”) is uniquely associated and stored. The number of times that the special symbol display can be executed means a special symbol lottery, in other words, a specified number of times of special symbol display related to notification of the result.

(Special symbol variation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 8 to FIG. 9 are diagrams showing an example of a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred to when determining a variation display mode of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as “special figure fluctuation pattern”). The special figure fluctuation pattern is associated with the time required for the special symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as “special figure fluctuation time”) and the production type of the variable presentation constituting the special figure lottery effect according to the fluctuation display of the special symbol. It has been. Although the details of the variation effect will be described later, it is an effect that is performed until the end of the variable symbol display of the special symbol as the start of the variable symbol variation display. In addition to the variable display of symbols, an image effect such as an object image such as a character by the image display device 14 or a predetermined movie image, an audio effect by the audio output device 15, an illumination effect by the effect lighting device 16, and an operation effect by the movable portion 17A. Consists of.

  The special symbol variation pattern includes a first special symbol variation pattern which is a variation display mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 and a first special symbol variation pattern which is displayed on the second special symbol display device 21. It is distinguished from the second special figure variation pattern which is a mode of variation display of two special symbols.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a special figure variation pattern in a non-short game state to be described later, and FIG. 9 is a special figure variation in a short time gaming state to be described later. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred when determining a pattern. That is, the special figure variation pattern determination table is largely divided according to the gaming state.

  The special symbol variation pattern determination table further includes special symbol stop symbol data and special symbol data reflecting the result of the special symbol determination and the type of the special symbol display device (starting port related to the special symbol display) that operates in the special symbol display. The figure is divided according to the reserved number (U1 or U2).

  In each table, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value and one or a plurality of special figure fluctuation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, by comparing the special figure variation pattern determination random number acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 with the special diagram variation pattern determination table, A special figure variation pattern is determined.

  The special figure fluctuation pattern is allocated with a predetermined probability set in advance in each table. Therefore, the special figure fluctuation pattern includes the expectation level of a big win and a specific big win (for example, a promising big win, a long win, etc.). Expectations are associated with each other.

  The special figure variation pattern is formally determined by the special figure variation pattern determination (step S313-3) at the time of starting the variation display of the special symbol (at the time of the special symbol memory determination processing in step S310). 6 and 7 (when the input control process in step S200) is entered, it is provisionally determined by the first pre-determination (step S236) or the second pre-determination (step S246).

  A start opening prize designation command and a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command are set corresponding to each special figure fluctuation pattern. The start opening winning designation command corresponds to the special figure variation pattern determined by the first pre-determination or the second pre-determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the first pre-determination or the second pre-determination. The special figure fluctuation pattern designation command corresponds to the special figure fluctuation pattern determined by the special figure fluctuation pattern determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the special figure fluctuation pattern determination.

  The special symbol variation pattern designation command is 1 byte for identifying the special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21) on which the special symbol variation display related to the special symbol determination is performed. MODE data and 1-byte DATA data for identifying a special figure variation pattern. For the special figure variation pattern designation command, if the MODE data is “E6H”, this means that the special symbol variation display is performed on the first special symbol display device 20, and if the MODE data is “E7H”, 2 Indicates that special symbols are displayed on the special symbol display device 21 in a variable manner.

  Note that the special map fluctuation pattern designation command with MODE data “E6H” is “first special figure fluctuation pattern designation command”, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command with MODE data “E7H” is “second special figure”. This is called “variation pattern designation command”.

  The start opening winning designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the type of the start opening and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the special figure variation pattern.

  Regarding the start opening prize designation command, if the MODE data is “E1H”, it indicates that a game ball has entered the first start opening 6, and if the MODE data is “E2H”, the second start opening 7 is displayed. Indicates that a game ball has entered. It should be noted that the start opening prize designation command with MODE data “E1H” is “first start opening prize designation command”, and the start opening prize designation command with MODE data “E2H” is “second start opening prize designation command”. "

  In addition, in the rightmost column of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table, the effect type (rough classification) of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern is described as a reference.

  Here, the effect type of the change effect related to the special figure change pattern described in the column of the effect type in FIGS. 8 and 9 will be described.

  The “no reach” described in FIGS. 8 and 9 is a normal variation effect without a reach, and is a variation effect that makes it difficult for a player to have the expectation of a big win.

  “Reach” gives a player a sense of expectation of jackpot, such that a combination of the decorative symbols TZ1 to TZ3 for notifying the jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other decorative symbols TZ1 to TZ3 change. This means a variation mode. For example, when a combination of three-digit decorative symbols TZ1 to TZ3 of “777” is set as a combination of decorative symbols TZ1 to TZ3 for notifying the jackpot, two decorative symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are temporarily stopped at “7”. (Pseudo-stop), and refers to a mode in which the remaining decorative symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are changing.

  The “temporary stop” means that the decorative symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are shaken small or the decorative symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are deformed to a small extent so that the player can see that the decorative symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are stopped. It is sometimes called a pseudo stop.

  The “normal reach” described in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 is a kind of reach effect, and a change effect in which a reach effect is established by a change effect but a specific effect that suggests a big win winning expectation is not executed thereafter. It is. In addition, the variation effect of “normal reach” is not so high in the jackpot winning expectation degree, but since the reach state is established, the expectation degree of winning in the big hit is higher than the changing effect without reach.

  In the present embodiment, “normal reach” is not selected as the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the big win, but “normal reach” is selected as the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the big win. You can also.

  “SP reach”, “SPSP reach 1” and “SPSP reach 2” described in FIGS. 8 and 9 are a kind of reach production, and a specific production suggesting the degree of expectation of winning a big hit is executed, and “normal reach” is executed. This is a so-called “super reach production” with a higher expectation of winning a big hit.

  “SP Reach” is a reach production that has a higher probability of winning a big hit than “Normal Reach”.

  “SPSP reach 1” is a reach production in which “SPSP reach” is performed without going through “SP reach”, and “SPSP reach 2” is made through “SP reach” to “SPSP reach”. Is a reach production. “SPSP reach” is a reach production with a higher degree of expectation of winning a big hit than “SP reach”. In other words, “SPSP Reach 1” and “SPSP Reach 2” have a higher probability of winning the jackpot than “SP Reach”.

  Although not described in the column of effect types in FIGS. 8 and 9, in the present embodiment, pseudo-ream can be executed in any variation effect. The “pseudo-ream” is a temporary change of the decorative symbols TZ1 to TZ3 during the temporary display of the special symbols corresponding to one special symbol lottery, and then temporarily changed to change the temporary symbols TZ1 to TZ3. This means a notice effect by a variation mode in which the stop is performed once or a plurality of times.

  FIG. 10A to FIG. 10F show an example of a table used when controlling a normal symbol-based game based on winning to the winning gate 10.

  FIG. 10A is a diagram illustrating an example of the hit determination table. The hit determination is to determine whether or not to execute an auxiliary game that involves opening the second start port 7. As described later, the winning determination is performed based on a winning determination random number acquired based on the passing of the game ball through the winning gate 10.

  The hit determination table is divided according to the start opening winning easiness. Specifically, the hit determination table is divided into a hit determination table referred to in the non-time-saving gaming state and a hit determination table referred to in the time-saving gaming state.

  In each hit determination table, a hit determination value and a determination result are uniquely associated and stored. By collating the acquired random number for hit determination with the hit determination table, either “winning” or “losing” is determined. When “winning” is won, an auxiliary game with the opening of the second start port 7 is executed.

  FIG.10 (b) is a figure which shows an example of a normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol determination is to determine a normal symbol to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. The normal symbol determination table is divided according to the hit determination result (win and miss).

  Each normal symbol determination table stores a normal symbol determination value and a normal symbol that is stopped and displayed in a uniquely associated manner. As will be described later, the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by comparing the normal symbol determination random number acquired when the game ball passes the winning gate 10 with the normal symbol determination table. As the normal symbol identification information to be stopped and displayed, the normal symbol stop symbol data and the normal effect symbol designation command are set.

  The normal stop symbol data is used in the process on the main control board 101, and the normal effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in the process on the effect control board 102.

  FIG. 10C determines a variation pattern of a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as a “normal diagram variation pattern”) associated with a time required to display a variation of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “normal diagram variation time”). It is a figure which shows the common figure fluctuation pattern determination table for this. The normal variation pattern determination table is composed of a general variation variation determination table that is referred to in the non-short game state and a general variation pattern determination table that is referred to in the short time gaming state.

  In each table, a common pattern variation pattern determination value and one or a plurality of common map variation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the normal variation pattern is determined by collating the random number for determining the normal variation pattern acquired when the game ball passes the winning gate 10 with the normal variation pattern determination table.

  FIG. 10D shows an example of the auxiliary game reference data determination table. This table stores data (auxiliary game reference data) that is referred to when performing an auxiliary game. As shown in FIG. 10 (d), in the auxiliary game reference data determination table, the combination of the current start port winning easiness and the normal stop symbol data is associated with the auxiliary game reference data. That is, the auxiliary game reference data includes information regarding the start opening winning easiness state and the result of the normal symbol determination when the normal symbol determination is performed.

  FIG. 10E is a diagram illustrating an example of an auxiliary game control table used when controlling the auxiliary game.

  The auxiliary game control table stores conditions for controlling the auxiliary game. As conditions for controlling the auxiliary game, an opening time, which is a period from when the auxiliary game is started to when the second opening 7 is first opened, and transmission to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening. Opening designation command, type of table used to control opening / closing of the second starting port 7, ending time, which is a period from the end of the last opening of the second starting port 7 to the end of the auxiliary game, And the ending designation | designated command transmitted to the production | presentation control board 102 at the time of ending start is set. The conditions for controlling these auxiliary games are associated with auxiliary game reference data.

  FIG. 10F is a diagram showing an example of a second start port opening / closing control table for auxiliary games used when controlling opening / closing of the second start port 7. Conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second start port 7 during the auxiliary game are stored in the second start port opening / closing control table for the auxiliary game. As conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 7, a general electric operation number (D) which is an opening number (operation of the second starting port control device 70) number of the second starting port 7 in the auxiliary game, 2 Opening time and closing time (operation time / non-operation time) of the start port 7 are set.

(Explanation of special game types)
In the present embodiment, a “big hit game” that is executed when the “big hit” is won as a special game advantageous to the player, with the opening of the big prize opening 8 (operation of the big prize control device 80). Is provided. The jackpot game is divided into a “long hit game” and a “short hit game” mainly depending on the opening / closing mode of the big winning opening 8.

  In the jackpot game, a round game involving one or more opening of the big winning opening 8 is executed a predetermined number of times. In each round game, the number of times that the special winning opening 8 can be opened (hereinafter referred to as the maximum number of times of opening) and the total time that can be opened (hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening time) are set in advance. The reason that “can be opened” is that the number of game balls that can enter the big winning opening 8 during one round game is limited (for example, 9). Therefore, even if the grand prize winning opening 8 is not opened the maximum number of times of opening, the big winning prize opening 8 may be closed and the round game may end. Even if the maximum opening time has not elapsed, the special winning opening 8 is closed and the round game may end. It should be noted that the maximum number of times and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 8 in each round game may or may not be unified for each jackpot game.

(Description of game conditions)
Next, game conditions that are conditions when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability and the start opening winning easiness are set as the game conditions. As for the jackpot winning probability, the game progresses under the low-probability gaming state or the high-probability gaming state, and the game ball progresses under the short-time gaming state or the non-short-time gaming state with respect to the ease of winning the game opening. To do. The initial (power-on) gaming conditions are set to a low probability gaming state and a non-short-time gaming state, and this low probability gaming state and a non-time-short gaming state are referred to as a normal gaming state. Note that even during the jackpot game, the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state are entered.

  In the present embodiment, the low-probability gaming state with respect to the jackpot winning probability means that the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot determination is set to be relatively disadvantageous to the player at 1/350. On the other hand, the high probability gaming state is that the jackpot winning probability is higher than that of the low probability gaming state, that is, set to 1/40 which is relatively advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the jackpot winning probability is in a high probability gaming state, winning a jackpot is easier than in the low probability gaming state, and the number of winning jackpots per unit time is relatively large, which is advantageous to the player. It can be said that it is a state.

  The non-time-saving gaming state is a state in which the start opening winning easiness is normal. Specifically, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the normal time variation time is set to 15 seconds, and the operation time (second start time) of the second start port control device 70 that operates when “winning” is won in the winning determination. The sum of the opening time of the mouth 7) is set to 0.2 seconds or 5.1 seconds, and the probability of winning in the hit determination for the normal symbol is set to 1/50. Note that the “total opening time” is that the second start port 7 may be opened multiple times for each win, and a game ball can be won for each win. This is because the number is limited, and when a game ball is won, it closes without waiting for the opening time.

  On the other hand, in the short-time gaming state, the opening time of the second starting port 7 per unit time (the operating time of the second starting port control device 70) is longer than in the non-short-time gaming state, and the second starting port 7 Is a gaming state that tends to be open. Due to the relatively high start opening prize ease, the number of times the second special symbol determination can be performed per unit time increases. Under the same jackpot winning probability, the number of executions of the second special symbol determination per unit time inevitably increases the number of winning jackpots per unit time. It can be said that this is an advantageous state for the player as compared to the gaming state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the short-time gaming state, the normal variation time is set to 3.0 seconds, the total maximum opening time of the second start port 7 is set to 5.2 seconds, The probability of winning is set to 49/50. That is, all the components of the start opening winning ease are set to be more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving gaming state. In the short-time gaming state, the second start port 7 is opened twice via a 1.5 second closure (interval), but it may be opened only once without the closure. Moreover, the closure may be provided a plurality of times.

  In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the start openings 6 and 7, three prize balls can be obtained, but the player fires the game ball by operating the appropriate launch handle 32. However, the number of game balls possessed by the player tends to decrease. However, in the short-time gaming state, since it is easier to enter the second starting port 7 than in the non-short-time gaming state, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of game balls possessed by the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of game balls possessed by the player, the short-time game state is set to be more advantageous for the player than the non-short-time game state.

  In this way, by winning the jackpot, the type of jackpot game (long win game / short win game) and the game conditions newly set after the jackpot game (low probability game state / high probability game state and non-time short game state / In combination with the short-time gaming state). In view of this, the substantial jackpot type (the jackpot type based on the profits enjoyed by the player) includes the type of jackpot game to be executed and the game conditions newly set after the jackpot game ends ( It can be said that it is a combination with (gaming state). Therefore, hereinafter, apart from the type of jackpot based on the special figure stop symbol data, based on the combination of the type of jackpot game derived by the jackpot and the game conditions after the jackpot game, that is, based on the type of profit that the player enjoys The jackpot type can be classified.

  The long win game is executed by winning the jackpot, and then the high jackpot that is set to the high-probability game state and the short-time game state is set to “high-probability short-lived length (per probability variable length)”, and the long-win game is executed by winning the jackpot After that, the jackpot to be set to the low probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state is “low probability short-lived long (usually per length)”, the short-winning game is executed by winning, and then the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state The jackpot to be set is referred to as “high probability short-lived short-and-short win (probability short-cut per win)”.

  When the jackpot is won, the normal game state is set when the jackpot game starts regardless of the state before the jackpot game. That is, during the jackpot game, the low probability game state and the non-short-time game state are entered.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main process of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG.

  When power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the main CPU 101a, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101a, and the main CPU 101a performs the following main processing.

  First, in step S10, the main CPU 101a performs an initialization process. In this process, the main CPU 101a reads the activation program from the main ROM 101b in response to power-on, determines whether or not a RAM clear switch (not shown) is turned on, and the RAM clear switch is turned on. First, processing for initializing each storage area of the main RAM 101c is performed. When the RAM clear switch is not turned on, processing for restoring (returning) the control state to before the power-off (power failure) is performed.

  In step S20, the main CPU 101a updates the special figure fluctuation random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display of the special symbol composed of the reach determination random number and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number. .

  In step S30, the main CPU 101a updates an initial value random number including an initial value random number for jackpot determination, an initial value random number for special symbol determination, an initial value random number for hit determination, and the like. Thereafter, the processes of step S20 and step S30 are repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG. The following timer interrupt processing is executed by generating a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 101.

  First, in step S100, the main CPU 101a saves the information stored in the register of the main CPU 101a to the stack area.

  In step S110, the main CPU 101a performs a special game variable counter update process, a special symbol stop time update process, an opening time update process, an open / close time update process for the special winning opening 8, and the like. And the time control process which updates the auxiliary | assistant game timer counter which performs the update process of the change time of a normal symbol, the update process of the stop time of a normal symbol, the update process of the opening / closing time of the 2nd start port 7, etc. is performed.

  In step S120, the main CPU 101a updates a specific random number composed of a jackpot determination random number, a special symbol determination random number, a hit determination random number, and a normal symbol determination random number.

  In step S130, the main CPU 101a performs an initial value random number update process for updating the jackpot determining initial value random number, the special symbol initial value random number, and the winning determination initial value random number.

  For updating various random numbers, the random number is updated by adding “1” to a random number counter provided for each type of random number. Various random numbers have a random number range. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value determined for the random number. In the update of the random number, when the random number indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, the random number counter is returned to “0” without adding “1”, and the random number indicated by the random number counter is set once after being rounded. When the round initial value is reached, the initial random number at that time is set as a new round initial value, and each random number is newly updated.

  In step S200, the main CPU 101a performs input control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process for determining whether or not a new valid signal is transmitted from a predetermined detection sensor. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S300, the main CPU 101a performs the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the first special symbol hold display device 23, the second special symbol hold display device 24, and the special prize opening control device 80. Special symbol special electric control processing (special symbol related processing) for performing the above control (control of the special symbol system device). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S400, the main CPU 101a performs a normal signal normal power control process (normal signal control) for controlling the normal symbol display device 22, the normal symbol hold display device 25, and the second starting port control device 70 (control of the normal symbol system device). Perform symbolic processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S500, the main CPU 101a performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the winning ball counters corresponding to the starting port (the first starting port 6 and the second starting port 7), the big winning port 8 and the general winning port 11 have exceeded “0”. If it exceeds “0”, a prize ball request signal indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening is transmitted to the payout control board 103. When a prize ball signal is transmitted, an update process for subtracting “1” from the prize ball counter related to the signal is performed.

  In step S600, the main CPU 101a, external signal output control data for outputting information related to the game as an external signal to an external device such as the game information display device 700, the second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B, and the big prize opening / closing solenoid Drive control data for driving 80B (start opening / closing solenoid drive data and big prize opening / closing solenoid drive data), and predetermined symbols on the symbol display devices 20, 21, 22 and the hold display devices 23, 24, 25 Data creation processing of display control data (special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol hold display data, normal symbol hold display data) for display is performed.

  In step S700, the main CPU 101a performs output control processing. In this process, first, a port output process for outputting a signal based on the external signal output control data and the drive control data created in S600 is performed. Subsequently, in order to light each LED of the symbol display devices 20, 21, and 22 and the hold display devices 23, 24, and 25, display device output processing for outputting a signal based on the display control data created in step S600 is performed. . Finally, command transmission processing for transmitting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 101c to another board is also performed.

  In step S800, the main CPU 101a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 101a.

  The input control process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S210, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening 11. When the main CPU 101a does not input a detection signal from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S220. When the main CPU 101a receives a detection signal from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the main CPU 101a updates the general winning opening prize ball counter used for winning balls by adding predetermined data.

  In step S220, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the big winning opening detection sensor 8a has been inputted, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning opening 8. When the main CPU 101a has not input a detection signal from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S230. When the main CPU 101a receives a detection signal from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, the main CPU 101a adds predetermined data to the special winning opening prize ball counter used for the winning ball and updates it, and wins the big winning opening 8. The counter value of the round winning counter (C) for counting the played game balls is added and updated.

  In step S230, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first starting port detection sensor 6a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 6 (starting region). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S240, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the second starting port detection sensor 7a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 7 (starting region). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S250, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the winning gate detection sensor 10a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed the winning gate 10 (starting area). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the first start port detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S231, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the first start port detection sensor 6a. If there is no valid detection signal, the first start port detection signal input process is terminated. If there is a valid detection signal, the start port prize ball counter is updated by adding “1” in step S232, and the main RAM 101c is updated. The first start port winning process is performed to turn on the first start port winning flag in the first start port winning flag storage area.

  In step S233, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the first special figure hold number counter for counting the first special figure hold number (U1) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U1) is not less than 4, the main CPU 101a ends the first start port detection signal input process, and if the main CPU 101a determines that the first special figure reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the step In S234, the counter value of the first special figure reservation number counter is incremented by "1" and updated.

  In step S234, the main CPU 101a updates the first special symbol hold number (U1) displayed on the first special symbol hold display device 23 in order to update the special symbol hold display data indicating the hold number in the main RAM 101c. Set to area. In step S235, the main CPU 101a sets a first special symbol memory designation command corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. Thereby, the production control board 102 is notified of the first special figure reservation number (U1).

  In step S236, the main CPU 101a determines the jackpot determination random number indicated by the jackpot determination random number counter, the special symbol determination random number indicated by the special symbol determination random number counter, the reach determination random number indicated by the reach determination random number counter, and the special figure variation pattern. The random number for special figure fluctuation pattern determination indicated by the random number counter for determination is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area. Hereinafter, the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number, and the special figure variation pattern determination random number are collectively referred to as “special pattern determination information”.

  The first special symbol storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 11A), and the special figure determination information is a number in a storage unit in which random numbers are not stored. Are stored in order from the smallest storage unit. Each storage unit has an area for each stored random number (see FIG. 11B).

  In step S237, the main CPU 101a performs a first preliminary determination based on the game ball entering the first start port 6. Here, the first preliminary determination will be described.

  Specifically, in the first pre-determination, stop symbol data of the first special symbol and a first special symbol variation pattern are determined based on the special symbol determination information stored in the first special symbol holding storage area. That is, the main CPU 101a performs stop symbol data of the first special symbol as the first pre-determination before performing the jackpot determination processing (step S311), the special symbol determination processing (step S312), and the special symbol variation pattern determination processing (step S313). And a 1st special figure fluctuation pattern is determined.

  Then, in step S238, the main CPU 101a sends the stop symbol data of the first special symbol determined in the first pre-determination and the first start opening winning designation command corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation pattern to the transmission data for the effect in the main RAM 101c. This is set in the storage area (transmission buffer), and the first start port detection signal input process is terminated.

  Next, the second start port detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S241, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the second start port detection sensor 7a. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is no valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a ends the second start port detection signal input process. If it determines that there is a valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S242.

  In step S242, the main CPU 101a updates the start opening prize ball counter by adding “1”, updates the second start opening prize specifying counter by adding “1”, and also updates the second start opening winning prize in the main RAM 101c. A second start port winning process is performed to turn on the second start port winning flag in the flag storage area. The second start opening prize prescribed counter counts the number of wins to the second start opening 7 in one auxiliary game. This is because, in the present embodiment, the number of balls entering the second starting port 7 for a single auxiliary game is limited.

  In step S243, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol reservation number counter for counting the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U2) is not smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a ends the second start port detection signal input process, and if it determines that the second special figure holding number (U2) is smaller than 4, the step The processing is moved to S244.

  In step S244, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the counter value (U2) of the second special figure pending number counter and updates it. Further, in step S244, the main CPU 101a updates the second special symbol hold number (U2) displayed on the second special symbol hold display device 24 in step S244 to display the special symbol hold display data indicating the hold number in the main RAM 101c. Set to a predetermined area. In step S245, the main CPU 101a sets a second special symbol memory designation command corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number (U2) in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. Thereby, the second special figure reservation number (U2) is notified to the effect control board 102.

  In step S246, the main CPU 101a determines the jackpot determination random number indicated by the jackpot determination random number counter, the special symbol determination random number indicated by the special symbol determination random number counter, the reach determination random number indicated by the reach determination random number counter, and the special figure variation pattern. The random number for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination indicated by the random number counter for determination is stored in the second special symbol storage area.

  The second special symbol holding storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 11A), and the special figure determination information is a number in a storage unit in which no random number is stored. Are stored in order from the smallest storage unit. Each storage unit has an area for each stored random number (see FIG. 11B).

  And main CPU101a performs the 2nd prior determination based on the entrance into the 2nd starting port 7 in step S247. Here, the second prior determination will be described.

  Specifically, in the second pre-determination, the stop symbol data of the second special symbol and the second special symbol variation pattern are determined based on the special symbol determination information stored in the second special symbol storage area. That is, the main CPU 101a performs stop symbol data of the second special symbol as the second pre-determination before performing the jackpot determination processing (step S311), the special symbol determination processing (step S312), and the special symbol variation pattern determination processing (step S313). The second special figure variation pattern is determined.

  Then, in step S248, the main CPU 101a sends the stop symbol data of the second special symbol determined in the second preliminary determination and the second start opening prize designation command corresponding to the second special symbol fluctuation pattern to the transmission data for the effect in the main RAM 101c. This is set in the storage area (transmission buffer), and the second start port detection signal input process is terminated.

  Next, winning gate detection signal input processing will be described with reference to FIG. In step S251, it is determined whether there is a valid detection signal from the winning gate detection sensor 10a. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is no valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a ends the main winning gate detection signal input process. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is a valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S252.

  In step S252, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the normal symbol holding number counter for counting the number of normal symbol holdings (G) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (G) is not smaller than 4, the main winning gate detection signal input process is terminated, and if it is determined that the counter value (G) is smaller than 4, the process proceeds to step S253.

  In step S253, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the counter value (G) of the general-purpose pending number counter and updates it. In step S253, the main CPU 101a updates the normal symbol hold number (G) displayed on the normal symbol hold display device 25 in the predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to update the normal symbol hold number (G). set. Further, in step S254, the main CPU 101a sets a normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of reserved symbols (G) in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. As a result, the drawing reservation number (G) is notified to the effect control board 102.

  In step S255, the main CPU 101a determines a hit determination random number indicated by the hit determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination random number indicated by the normal symbol determination random number counter, and a normal pattern variation pattern determination random number indicated by the normal symbol variation pattern determination random number counter. Is stored in the normal symbol storage area, and the winning gate detection signal input process is terminated. Hereinafter, the hit determination random number, the normal symbol determination random number, and the common pattern variation pattern determination random number are collectively referred to as “normal pattern determination information”.

  The normal symbol holding storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 11C), and the common symbol determination information is a memory having a small number in a storage unit in which random numbers are not stored. It is memorized in order from the part. Each storage unit has an area for each stored random number (see FIG. 11D).

  Next, the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S301, the value of the special figure special electricity processing data is loaded, and the branch destination address is referred to from the special figure special electric treatment data loaded in step S302, and if the special figure special electric treatment data = 0, the special symbol memory determination process (step S310). ), The process moves to the special symbol variation process (step S320) if the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, and the special symbol stop process (step S330) if the special symbol special electric treatment data = 2. If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the process is transferred to the jackpot game process (step S340), and if the special figure special electric process data = 4, the process is transferred to the big hit game end process (step S350). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The special symbol memory determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special symbol is being variably displayed. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol variation display is in progress, the main CPU 101a ends the special symbol storage determination process. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol variation display is not in progress, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step 310-2.

  In step S310-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second special figure holding number (U2) is 1 or more. If it is determined that the second special figure hold number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-4. If it is determined that the second special figure hold number (U2) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-3. Move processing.

  In step S310-3, the main CPU 101a updates the counter value of the second special symbol hold number counter by subtracting “1”, and in step S310-6, corresponds to the second special figure hold number (U2) after the subtraction. The special symbol memory designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S310-7, the main CPU 101a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the effect transmission data storage area, and in step S310-8, the data stored in the second special symbol holding storage area. The special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

  For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage region. Also, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol storage area is shifted to the special symbol common storage area (the zeroth storage unit) common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Then, the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit is deleted. Thereby, the special figure determination information used in the previous game is deleted. Further, the special figure stop symbol data and game condition data used in the previous game are also erased from the corresponding storage areas.

  On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the first special figure hold number (U1) is 1 or more. If the main CPU 101a determines in step S310-4 that the first special figure hold number (U1) is 1 or more, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S310-5.

  In step S310-5, the main CPU 101a updates the counter value of the first special symbol reservation number counter by subtracting “1”, and in step S310-6, corresponds to the first special figure reservation number (U1) after the subtraction. A special symbol memory designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S310-7, the main CPU 101a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the effect transmission data storage area, and in step S310-8, the data stored in the first special symbol holding storage area. The special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

  For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage region. Also, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol storage area is shifted to the special symbol storage area (the zero storage unit) and stored in the zero storage unit. The figure determination information is deleted. Thereby, the special figure determination information used in the previous game is deleted. Further, the special figure stop symbol data and game condition data used in the previous game are also erased from the corresponding storage areas.

  In addition, in order to update the 1st special figure reservation number (U1) or the 2nd special figure reservation number (U2) with the shift process of the special figure determination information in step S310-8, specifically, the data In order to change the display contents of the special symbol hold display devices 23 and 24 corresponding to the type of the start port according to the above, first and second special symbol hold display data are set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. The hold display data includes information on the type of the special symbol hold display device and information on the special symbol hold number (U1 or U2).

  In the present embodiment, the second special symbol reservation storage area is shifted in priority to the first special symbol reservation storage area in steps S310-2 to S310-8. However, the game ball enters the start port. The first special symbol reserved storage area or the second special symbol reserved storage area may be shifted in the order of the balls, or the first special symbol reserved storage area may be shifted with priority over the second special symbol reserved storage area. May be.

  If it is determined in step S310-4 that the first special symbol hold number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to steps S319-1 to S319-3 to set the customer waiting state. Wait state setting processing is performed. The customer waiting state refers to a state in which special symbol variation display and special games are not executed.

  As the customer waiting state setting process, the main CPU 101a first determines whether or not the customer waiting state determination flag “01H” is set in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area in step S319-1. When the customer waiting state determination flag “01H” is set in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area, the main CPU 101a ends the special symbol storage determination process, and determines the customer waiting state determination in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area. If the flag “01H” is not set, the process proceeds to step S319-2.

  In step S319-2, the main CPU 101a sets the customer waiting state determination flag “01H” in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area because the customer waiting state is not repeatedly set.

  In step S319-3, the main CPU 101a sets a customer waiting state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol memory determination process. As a result, the effect control board 102 is notified that the customer is waiting.

  In step S311, the main CPU 101a executes a jackpot determination process based on the data shifted in step S310-8 and newly stored in the zeroth storage unit.

  Here, the jackpot determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S311-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the big hit determination process is performed based on a game ball entering the first start port 6.

  When determining that the main CPU 101a is the first start port 6 in step S311-1, the main CPU 101a selects the first special symbol jackpot determination table in step S311-2. On the other hand, when determining that the main CPU 101a is not the first start port 6 (the second start port 7) in step S311-1, the main CPU 101a selects the second special symbol jackpot determination table in step S311-3.

  Next, in step S311-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. Here, the fact that the flag is turned on in the high-probability flag storage area means that the current jackpot winning probability is a high-probability gaming state.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-4 that the flag is ON in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-5, the main CPU 101a further selects “from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3”. The “first high probability jackpot determination table” or the “second high probability jackpot determination table” is selected.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101a determines that the flag is not turned on in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-6, the “first low probability” is further selected from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3. "Big jackpot determination table" or "Second low probability jackpot determination table" is selected.

  In step S311-7, the main CPU 101a shifts the jackpot determination random number in the 0th storage unit after being shifted in step S310-6 to the “high probability jackpot selected in step S311-5 or step S311-6”. It is checked against “determination table” or “low-probability jackpot determination table” to determine whether it is “big jackpot” or “losing”, and this jackpot determination process is terminated.

  When the big hit determination process ends, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 19, and performs the special symbol determination process in step S312. In the special symbol determination process, a special symbol that is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination process. Here, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 101a determines in step S312-1 whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is “winning winning”. If it is determined that the game is a “hit winning”, the main CPU 101a selects a special symbol determination table for the jackpot winning in step S312-4. The processing is moved to S312-2.

  In step S312-2, the main CPU 101a performs reach determination. Specifically, the reach determination random number value shifted in step S310-8 and stored in the 0th storage unit is collated with the reach determination table.

  In step S <b> 312-3, the main CPU 101 a determines whether or not “reach” is determined as a result of the reach determination in step S <b> 312-2. If it is determined that “reach is present”, the process proceeds to step S312-5, and a special symbol determination table for reach loss is selected. On the other hand, if it is not “reach”, that is, it is determined that “no reach”, the process proceeds to step S312-6 to select a special symbol determination table for loss without reach.

  In step S312-7, the main CPU 101a confirms the start port related to the special symbol memory determination process based on the flag turned on in the start port winning flag storage area (the first start port 6 or the second start port 7). In step S312-8, one of the special symbol determination table for the first startup port and the special symbol determination table for the second startup port is selected based on the type of the startup port.

  In step S312-9, the main CPU 101a performs a special symbol determination in which the special symbol determination random number value shifted in step S310-8 and stored in the 0th storage unit is checked against the selected special symbol determination table.

  In step S312-10, an effect symbol designation command is determined based on the result of the special symbol determination in step S312-9, and the determined effect symbol designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 101a determines in step S312-1 that stop symbol data related to the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol stop symbol data") based on the result of the special symbol determination in step S312-11, that is, the special symbol. The determined special figure stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  As will be described later, the determined special symbol stop symbol data determines “special bonus special symbol” or the like in the special symbol stop pattern of FIG. 24 when determining the special symbol variation pattern in the special symbol variation pattern determination process of FIG. At this time, it is also used when determining the opening / closing mode of the big winning opening 8 in the big hit game processing of FIG.

  In step S312-2, the main CPU 101a compares the special figure stop symbol data with the game condition data determination table, sets the game condition data, and ends the special symbol determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a confirms the high probability flag storage area, and selects a game condition data determination table according to the current status of the jackpot winning probability. Next, the special condition stop symbol data is compared with the selected game condition data determination table to determine the game condition data, and set in the game condition data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  When the special symbol determination process is completed as described above, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG. 19 and performs the special symbol variation pattern determination process in step S313. In the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process, a special figure fluctuation pattern including information on the special figure fluctuation time and the effect type of the fluctuating effect described later, based on the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the special symbol determination, and the result of the reach determination decide.

  The special figure variation pattern determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 101a refers to ON / OFF of a high-probability flag, which will be described later, and ON / OFF of a short-time flag, to determine the current gaming state (high probability gaming state / low probability gaming state, and (Time saving gaming state / non-time saving gaming state) is checked, and a special figure variation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state is selected.

  In step S313-2, the main CPU 101a checks the special figure stop symbol data stored in the main RAM 101c, and determines a special figure variation pattern determination table based on the special figure stop symbol data. This is because in the present embodiment, the special figure variation pattern determination table divided according to the gaming state is further divided by special figure stop symbol data.

  In addition, when the special figure stop symbol data is “19” or “29”, that is, when the result of the special symbol lottery is losing without reach, the number of special figure suspensions (U1 or The special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is determined based on U2). This is because, in the present embodiment, the special figure variation pattern determination table related to the reachless loss is also divided according to the special figure reservation number.

  If the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is determined, the main CPU 101a performs special figure fluctuation pattern determination in step S313-3. Specifically, a special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number is collated with the determined special figure fluctuation pattern determination table to determine a special figure fluctuation pattern.

  When the main CPU 101a determines the special symbol variation pattern, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG. 19, and in step S310-9, the special graphic variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern is transmitted for the effect in the main RAM 101c. Set in the data storage area.

  As a result, the special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and the effect control board 102 receives the game state designation command, the production symbol designation command, and the special figure variation pattern designation command, thereby displaying the variation of the special symbol. Is determined, and the variation effect pattern associated with the content of the variation effect is determined based on the game state designation command, the effect symbol designation command, and the special figure variation pattern designation command. It should be noted that the effect control board 102 may recognize that the special symbol variation display starts upon reception of the effect symbol designation command and / or the special symbol variation pattern designation command. Further, the gaming state designation command may be transmitted after the transmission of the effect symbol designation command or the special figure variation pattern designation command.

  In step S310-10, the main CPU 101a sets the special figure change time (see FIGS. 8 and 9) associated with the special figure change pattern in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S310-11, the main CPU 101a sets special symbol variation display data for the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 to perform the special symbol variation display. The special symbol variation display data includes information such as the type of the special symbol display device to be operated, the variation display mode, and the variation time.

  In step S310-12, the main CPU 101a sets the flag “00H” in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area, that is, clears the customer waiting state determination flag storage area, thereby ending the customer waiting state. At 13, the special symbol special electricity processing data = 1 is set, and the special symbol memory determination processing is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol variation process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special symbol variation display ends, in other words, whether or not the special symbol variation time set in step S310-10 has elapsed (special game timer). Counter = 0?). As a result, if it is determined that the special symbol variation display does not end, the special symbol variation processing is terminated, and the next subroutine is executed.

  If the main CPU 101a determines that the variation display of the special symbol is terminated, in step S320-2, the main CPU 101a produces a special symbol variation stop designation command to notify the rendering control board 102 that the variation display of the special symbol is terminated. Set in the transmission data storage area.

  In step S320-3, the main CPU 101a displays special figure stop display data based on the special figure stop symbol data set in step S312-11 in order to stop and display the special symbols on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21. Set. Thereby, the result of the special symbol lottery is notified to the player. In step S320-4, the main CPU 101a sets the time required for the special symbol stop display (hereinafter referred to as "special figure stop time", for example, 0.8 seconds) to the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S320-5, the main CPU 101a sets 2 in the special figure special electricity processing data, and in step S320-6, turns off the first starting opening prize flag or the second starting opening prize flag, and this special symbol variation process. Exit.

  The special symbol stop process will be described with reference to FIG. First, the main CPU 101a first determines whether or not the special symbol stop display ends in step S330-1, in other words, the special figure stop time set in the special game timer counter in step S320-4 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (special game timer counter = 0?). As a result, when it is determined that the special symbol stop display does not end, the special symbol stop processing is terminated, and when it is determined that the special symbol stop display ends, the process proceeds to step S330-2.

  In step S330-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the time reduction flag is turned on in the time reduction flag storage area. The fact that the hour / hour flag is ON in the hour / hour flag storage area means that the current state is the hour / hour gaming state. If the hour / hour flag is ON in the hour / hour flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-3, and if the hour / hour flag is OFF in the hour / hour flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-6.

  In step S330-3, the main CPU 101a calculates “1” from the counter value of the remaining number counter in the short time gaming state indicating the remaining number of times the special symbol change display according to the short time gaming state (J: hereinafter referred to as “the remaining number of short time gaming states”). The operation value (J-1) obtained by subtracting "is stored as the remaining time-saving gaming state count (J).

  In step S330-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the remaining time-saving gaming state count (J) = 0. If the remaining time-saving gaming state (J) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-5. If the remaining time-short gaming state remaining number (J) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-6.

  In step S330-5, the main CPU 101a turns off the time reduction flag stored in the time reduction flag storage area. It should be noted that the fact that the short time gaming state remaining number (J) is “0” means that the special symbol is displayed in a variable number of times (Ja) in the short time gaming state. Means to end.

  In step S330-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the high probability flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. The fact that the high probability flag is ON in the high probability flag storage area means that the current state is a high probability gaming state. If the high probability flag storage area is turned on, the process proceeds to step S330-7. If the high probability flag storage area is turned off, the process proceeds to step S330-10. Move.

  In step S330-7, the main CPU 101a displays the counter value of the high-probability gaming state remaining number counter indicating the remaining number of times of display of the special symbol variation display due to the high-probability gaming state (X: hereinafter referred to as “the remaining number of high-probability gaming states”). The operation value (X−1) obtained by subtracting “1” from the value is stored as a new high probability gaming state remaining number (X).

  In step S330-8, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the high probability gaming state remaining count (X) = 0. If the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-9. If the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) = 0 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S330-10.

  In step S330-9, the main CPU 101a turns off the high probability flag stored in the high probability flag storage area. Note that the high probability gaming state remaining count (X) is “0” means that the special symbol is displayed in a variable number of executable times (Xa) in the high probability gaming state, and the special symbol based on the “high probability” state. This means that the fluctuation display of is finished.

  In step S330-10, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current gaming condition, and sets a gaming state designation command indicating the gaming state in the effect transmission data storage area.

  In step S330-11, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol stop process is “jackpot”. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area relates to the jackpot special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 10 to 12, 20 to 21). To do. If it is determined that the jackpot special symbol is determined, the process proceeds to step S330-12. If the jackpot special symbol is not determined, the process proceeds to step S330-13.

  In step S330-12, the main CPU 101a sets 0 in the special symbol special electric processing data, and shifts the processing to the special symbol memory determination processing shown in FIG.

  In step S330-13, the main CPU 101a sets 3 to the special figure special processing data, and in step S330-14, the game condition flag storage area (time-short flag storage area and high-probability flag storage area), high-probability gaming state The remaining variation counter and the remaining variation counter in the short-time gaming state are reset. That is, the low probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state are controlled.

  In step S330-15, the main CPU 101a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area as the jackpot game opening process. Next, the main CPU 101a sets the opening time corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  The jackpot game process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently opening. The term “opening” as used herein refers to a period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first round game (first opening of the big winning opening 8). If it is determined that the current opening is being performed, the process proceeds to step S340-2. If it is determined that the current opening is not currently performed, the process proceeds to step S340-6.

  In step S340-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and if the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the set opening time has not elapsed, the main jackpot game process is terminated, the next subroutine is executed, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-3. .

  In step S340-3, the main CPU 101a performs a jackpot game start process. Specifically, according to the special figure stop symbol data, which jackpot is confirmed, a jackpot opening / closing control table corresponding to the jackpot type is selected and set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Specifically, the long winning game winning prize opening / closing control table or the short winning game winning prize opening / closing control table is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in accordance with the special figure stop symbol data. Next, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the value (round number (R)) stored in the round game number storage area and stores the value. Since the round game has not been executed at the time of step S340-3, the main CPU 101a stores “1” in the round game count storage area.

  In step S340-4, the main CPU 101a performs a special prize opening process. Specifically, “1” is added to the value stored in the special electric operation number storage area (special electric operation number (K)) and stored. The main CPU 101a sets the big prize opening / closing solenoid energization start data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to energize the big prize opening / closing solenoid 80B and open the big prize opening 8. Here, the main CPU 101a refers to the special winning opening / closing control table determined in step 340-3, and based on the round number (R) and the special operation number (K), the opening time of the special winning opening 8 ( The operating time of the big prize opening control device 80) is set in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S340-5, the main CPU 101a performs a round designation command transmission determination process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not K = 1. If K = 1, a round designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area. This is because information indicating that the round game starts is transmitted to the effect control board 102. For example, at the time of the first release of the first round game per long game, “1” is set in the round game number storage area and “1” is set in the special operation number storage area. A round designation command indicating one round game is set in the effect transmission data storage area. On the other hand, if “1” is not set in the special operation number storage area, the big hit game process is terminated without setting the round designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. That is, since the case where K = 1 means the start of a round game, the main CPU 101a transmits a round designation command only at the start of the round. When the effect control board 102 receives the round designation command, an effect display is performed on the image display device 14 such as “ROUND1”.

  In step S340-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently ending. Ending here refers to the period from the end of all previously set round games (after the final opening of the big winning opening 8 is completed) to the end of the big hit game. Therefore, if it is determined that the current ending is in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-17, where it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed, and if it is determined that the current ending is not currently in progress, step S340-7 is performed. Move processing to.

  In step S340-7, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the big prize opening 8 is open, that is, whether or not the big prize opening control device 80 is in operation. If the main CPU 101a determines that the big prize opening 8 is being opened, it determines in step S340-8 whether or not an “opening end condition” for ending the opening of the big prize opening 8 is satisfied. To do. As the “opening end condition”, the counter value of the round winning counter has reached a specified number (for example, 9) in the round game, or the maximum open time has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0) ) Is adopted. If it is determined that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S340-9. If it is determined that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied, the big hit game process is ended.

  In step S340-9, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening closing process. In the special winning opening closing process, the energization stop data of the special winning opening / closing solenoid 80B is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 102c in order to close the special winning opening 8, and the opening / closing of the special winning opening determined in step 340-3 is performed. Referring to the control table, based on the current round number (R) and special operation number (K), the closing time of the special winning opening 8 is set in the special game timer counter. As a result, the special winning opening 8 is closed.

  In step S340-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not one round game has ended. Specifically, in one round game, the special electric operation number (K) is the number of times of opening set in the round game, or the counter value (C) of the round winning counter is a specified number (for example, 9) ) Is terminated on the condition that it has been reached, it is determined whether or not such a condition is satisfied. If it is determined that one round game has been completed, the process proceeds to step S340-12. If it is determined that one round has not been completed, the big hit game process is ended.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-7 that the special winning openings 8 and 9 are not open, the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-11 whether a preset closing time has elapsed. As a result, if the closing time has not elapsed, the main jackpot game process is terminated, and if the closing time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-4.

  In step S340-12, the main CPU 101a performs a reset process. Specifically, the special electricity operation number storage area is cleared and the counter value of the round winning counter is cleared.

  In step S340-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the jackpot game ends, that is, whether the value (round number (R)) stored in the round game number storage area is the number of round games executed in the jackpot game. Determine whether or not. When determining “Yes”, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S340-15, and when determining “No”, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S340-14.

  In step S340-14, the main CPU 101a updates and stores the current round number (R) stored in the round game count storage area by adding “1”.

  In step S340-15, the main CPU 101a performs jackpot game end processing. Specifically, the round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area is reset.

  In step S340-16, the main CPU 101a performs an ending process. Specifically, according to the special figure stop symbol data, the type of jackpot is confirmed, and an ending designation command associated with the type of jackpot transmitted to the effect control board 102 is set in the effect transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 101a sets an ending time corresponding to the type of jackpot in the special game timer counter.

  In step S340-17, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S340-18 and passes the ending time. If it is determined that it is not, the jackpot game process is terminated.

  In step S340-18, the main CPU 101a sets 4 to the special figure special electric processing data, and shifts the processing to the jackpot game end processing shown in FIG.

  The jackpot game end process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 101a loads game condition data.

  In step S350-2, the main CPU 101a collates the loaded game condition data with the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not to turn on the high probability flag in the high probability flag storage area. If the main CPU 101a determines that the high probability flag is not turned ON, the process proceeds to step S350-4. If the main CPU 101a determines that the high probability flag is ON, in step S350-3, the high probability flag is stored in the high probability flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. (01H) is turned ON, and the executable number (Xa) is set in the high probability gaming state remaining number counter.

  In step S350-4, the main CPU 101a checks the loaded game condition data against the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not the time flag is turned on in the time flag storage area. If the main CPU 101a determines that the time reduction flag is not turned ON, the process proceeds to step S350-6. If the main CPU 101a determines that the time reduction flag is turned ON, the time reduction flag is turned ON in the time reduction flag storage area of the main RAM 101c in step S350-5. Then, the executable number (Ja) is set in the time-saving gaming state remaining number counter.

  In step S350-6, the main CPU 101a confirms the current game condition status, sets a game status designation command indicating the current game condition status in the effect transmission data storage area, and in step S350-7 The special electric processing data is set to 0, and the processing moves to the special symbol memory determination processing shown in FIG.

  With reference to FIG. 27, the ordinary map normal power control process will be described. First, the main CPU 101a loads the value of the ordinary power transmission processing data in step S401, refers to the branch address from the loaded ordinary power transmission processing data loaded in step S402, and if the ordinary power transmission processing data = 0. For example, a normal symbol memory determination process including a normal symbol determination as to whether or not to execute the auxiliary game (open the second start port 7) based on the general symbol determination information acquired based on the winning to the winning gate 10 If the normal symbol display data 22 is fluctuating based on the normal symbol determination, the normal symbol variation process (step S420) is performed. If the normal symbol display data = 2, the normal symbol display unit 22 stops the normal symbol stop process (step S430). Data = if 3 controls the opening and closing of the second start hole 7 (actuating the second start hole control device 70) and moves the process to the auxiliary game process (step S440).

  The normal symbol memory determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S410-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined that the normal symbol is being displayed, the main CPU 101a ends the normal symbol storage determination process. If it is determined that there is not, the process proceeds to step S410-2.

  In step S410-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the universal figure holding number counter for counting the universal figure holding number (G) is 1 or more. When the number of held general symbols (G) is “0”, the normal symbol variation display is not performed, so the normal symbol variation process is terminated.

  When the main CPU 101a determines in step S410-2 that the number of reserved symbols (G) is “1” or more, in step S410-3, the main CPU 101a determines from the counter value (G) of the normal symbol reservation number counter “G”. "1" is subtracted and updated, a new number of reserved common figure (G) is set, and in step S410-4, a normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the subtracted number of reserved general figure (G) is transmitted for production. Set in the data storage area. As a result, the drawing reservation number (G) is notified to the effect control board 102.

  In step S410-5, the main CPU 101a performs a shift process of the normal symbol determination information stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area. Specifically, the common figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the storage unit with the previous number. At this time, the common symbol determination information stored in the previous storage unit is written in a predetermined processing area and is erased from the normal symbol holding storage area. Here, in order to change the display content of the normal symbol hold display device 25 in accordance with the shift of the general symbol determination information, specifically, the normal symbol hold display data for displaying the current general symbol hold number (G). Is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S410-6, the main CPU 101a performs a hit determination, that is, a determination of a hit determination random number stored in the normal symbol holding storage area. Specifically, the main CPU 101a checks whether or not the hit determination random number for the normal symbol stored in the main ROM 101b is compared with the hit determination table shifted in step S410-5 and stored in the 0th storage unit. Judgment is made. In the present embodiment, the winning determination table is associated with the start opening winning ease state (non-short-time gaming state / short-time gaming state) (see FIG. 10A), so the short-time flag storage area And a hit determination table for a normal symbol related to the current start port winning easiness state is selected.

  In step S410-7, the main CPU 101a performs normal symbol determination. Specifically, the main CPU 101a performs normal symbol determination by collating the normal symbol determination random number stored in the 0th storage unit with the normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 101b after being shifted in step S410-5. As described above, since this normal symbol determination table is associated with the result of the hit determination (win / loss), the result of the hit determination is confirmed, and the normal symbol determination table related to the result of the hit determination is determined. select.

  In step S410-8, the main CPU 101a determines the stop symbol data related to the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “general symbol stop symbol data”), that is, the type of the normal symbol, based on the result of the normal symbol determination. The determined general symbol stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c, and in step S410-9, a normal effect symbol designating command corresponding to the general symbol stop symbol data is set in the effect transmission data storage region.

  When the determined general symbol stop pattern data is determined in the normal symbol variation pattern determination, the auxiliary symbol processing pattern in FIG. 31 is used in the normal symbol stop pattern processing in FIG. Is also used when determining the opening / closing mode of the second starting port 7.

  In step S410-10, the main CPU 101a performs general-purpose variation pattern determination. Specifically, since the normal pattern variation pattern determination table for performing the universal map variation pattern determination is classified according to the start opening winning easiness state, the main CPU 101a first confirms the time-short flag storage area, A general-purpose variation pattern determination table according to the current start opening winning easiness state is selected. Then, the main CPU 101a compares the random number for determining the customary pattern variation pattern stored in the 0th storage unit in the step S410-5 with the selected regular pattern variation pattern determination table, and determines the regular pattern variation pattern (ordinary diagram). (Variation time).

  In step S410-11, the main CPU 101a sets a normal pattern change pattern designation command corresponding to the determined normal figure change pattern in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c. The normal pattern change pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and the effect control board 102 recognizes that the change display of the normal symbol starts by receiving this command, and can execute the roulette effect described later.

  In step S410-12, the main CPU 101a sets the base map change time corresponding to the determined base map change pattern in the auxiliary game timer counter. The auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S410-13, the main CPU 101a sets the normal symbol variation display data to perform the normal symbol variation display on the ordinary symbol display device 22. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S410-14. The normal game stop symbol data is collated with the auxiliary game reference data determination table to determine auxiliary game reference data and set in the auxiliary game reference data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S410-15, the main CPU 101a sets “1” in the normal-use normal power processing data, and ends the normal symbol variation processing. The normal symbol variation display data includes information such as the type of the normal symbol display device 22 to be operated, the variation display mode, and the variation time.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S420-1, the main CPU 101a ends the normal symbol fluctuation display, in other words, whether or not the normal figure fluctuation time set in step S410-12 has elapsed (auxiliary game timer counter). = 0). As a result, when it is determined that the normal symbol variation display does not end, the normal symbol variation processing is terminated and the next subroutine is executed.

  In step S420-2, the main CPU 101a sets a normal effect symbol stop designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. In step S420-3, the main CPU 101a performs normal processing based on the normal symbol stop symbol data set in step S410-8. Data for stop display of general symbols for stopping display on the symbol display device 22 is set. As a result, the player is notified of the result of the normal symbol lottery. In step S420-4, the main CPU 101a sets a normal symbol stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) in the auxiliary game counter. The auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  Then, in step S420-5, the main CPU 101a sets 2 to the general-purpose normal power processing data, and ends this normal symbol variation processing.

  Next, the normal symbol stop process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S430-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the normal symbol stop display ends, in other words, whether or not the normal symbol stop time set in the auxiliary game timer counter in step S420-4 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (auxiliary game timer counter = 0?). As a result, when it is determined that the normal symbol stop display does not end, the normal symbol stop processing ends, and the next subroutine is executed.

  If the main CPU 101a determines that the normal symbol stop display is terminated, the main CPU 101a determines in step S430-2 whether or not the result of the hit determination related to the normal symbol stop process is “win”. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the general symbol stop symbol data stored in the normal symbol stop symbol data storage area is related to the normal symbol. Here, if it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, the process proceeds to step S430-4. If it is not determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, the process proceeds to step S430-3.

  In step S430-4, the main CPU 101a sets 3 to the ordinary power transmission processing data. Then, in step S430-5, the main CPU 101a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the usual figure stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c, and responds to the usual figure stop symbol based on the auxiliary game control table. The auxiliary game opening process is performed in which the opening time is set in the auxiliary game timer counter. The auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110. When this process is finished, the normal symbol stop process is finished.

  In step S430-3, the main CPU 101a sets 0 to the ordinary figure ordinary electricity processing data, and ends the normal symbol suspension process.

  The auxiliary game process will be described with reference to FIG. The main CPU 101a first determines in step S440-1 whether or not it is currently opening. If it is determined that it is currently opening, the process proceeds to step S440-2. If it is determined that it is not currently opening, the process proceeds to step S440-5.

  In step S440-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter = 0, and when the auxiliary game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the opening time has not elapsed, the auxiliary game process is terminated, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S440-3.

  In step S440-3, the main CPU 101a performs auxiliary game start processing. In the auxiliary game start process, the main CPU 101a first selects the second start port opening / closing control table based on the auxiliary game reference data stored in the auxiliary game reference data storage area of the main RAM 101c, and enters the predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. set.

  In step S440-4, the main CPU 101a performs a second start port opening process. In the second opening opening process, first, “1” is added to the value stored in the ordinary power operation number storage area (the ordinary power operation number (D)) and stored. And in order to operate 70 A of normal movable pieces, while setting the energization start data of the 2nd starting port opening / closing solenoid 70B, with reference to the 2nd starting port opening / closing control table set by said step S440-3, The opening time of the second start port 7 based on the general electric operation number (D) is set in the auxiliary game timer counter.

  In step S440-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently ending. Ending here refers to the period from the end of the last opening of the second start port 7 to the end of the auxiliary game. Therefore, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S440-12 when determining that it is currently ending, and shifts the process to step S440-6 when determining that it is not currently ending.

  In step S440-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second start port 7 is being opened. If the main CPU 101a determines that the second start port 7 is open, whether or not the “open end condition” for ending the opening of the second start port 7 is satisfied in step S440-7. Determine. As the “opening end condition”, the counter value of the starting opening prescribed winning counter has reached a prescribed (maximum) number (for example, 10), or that the opening time of one opening of the second starting opening 7 has elapsed ( Auxiliary game timer counter = 0) is adopted. Then, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S440-8 when determining that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, and ends the auxiliary game process when determining that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied. .

  In step S440-8, the main CPU 101a performs a second start port closing process. In the second start port closing process, energization stop data of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B is set to close the second start port 7, and the second start port opening / closing control table set in step S440-3 is set. The closing time of the second start port 7 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter on the basis of the current general electric operation number (D). As a result, the second start port 7 is closed.

  In step S440-9, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the auxiliary game end condition is satisfied and the auxiliary game is ended. The auxiliary game end condition is that the number of times the second start opening 7 is opened with a preset number of power transmission operation (D), or the counter value of the start opening prescribed winning counter is the maximum number (for example, 10). It has been reached. If the main CPU 101a determines that the auxiliary game end condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S440-10. If the main CPU 101a determines that the auxiliary game end condition is not satisfied, the main CPU 101a ends the auxiliary game process. .

  In step S440-10, the main CPU 101a performs an auxiliary game end process of setting “0” in the general electric operation number storage area and setting “0” in the second start opening prize regulation counter. That is, the general electric operation number storage area and the second start opening prescribed winning counter are cleared.

  In step S440-11, the main CPU 101a sets an ending designation command corresponding to the normal-design stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area, and at the same time, the ending time according to the standard-design stop symbol data based on the auxiliary game control table. Is set in the auxiliary game timer counter.

  When determining that the second start port 7 is not open in step S440-6, the main CPU 101a determines in step S440-13 whether or not the closing time set in step S440-8 has elapsed. To do. Note that the closing time is also determined by whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter = 0 as in the opening time. As a result, when determining that the closing time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101a ends the auxiliary game process, and when determining that the closing time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S440-4.

  In step S440-12, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed. If the main CPU 101a determines that the ending time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S440-14 and passes the ending time. If it is determined that it is not, the auxiliary game process is terminated.

  In step S440-14, the main CPU 101a sets the ordinary power transmission process data = 0, and ends the auxiliary game process.

(Main processing by production control board)
Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 102a in the effect control board 102 will be described.

  First, the main process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. When power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the sub CPU 102a, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 102a, and the sub CPU 102a performs the following main processing.

  First, in step S1001, the sub CPU 102a performs an initialization process. In this process, the main process program is read from the sub ROM 102b, and an initialization process for initializing the sub RAM 102c in which flags and commands are stored is performed.

  In step S1002, the sub CPU 102a determines an icon display mode determination random number, an effect symbol stop display pattern determination random number, a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination random number, a final number determination random number, a precursor effect scenario determination random number, and a variation effect pattern, which will be described later. An effect random number update process is performed for updating the effect random number used for determination for controlling the effect, including a determination random number, an effect mode determination random number, and the like.

  Note that a random number counter is provided in the sub-RAM 102c for each of various random numbers constituting the production random number. In the effect random number update process, “1” is added to the random number counter provided for each type of random number. A random number range is provided for various random numbers constituting the production random number. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value determined for the random number. Then, in the update of the random number, when the random value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, the random number counter is returned to “0” without adding “1”.

  Further, the maximum value of the random number range is set to be different depending on the type of random number. This is to prevent the random number counter related to the production random number from being completely synchronized and always having the same random number value. Since it is only necessary to prevent the random number counter related to the production random number from being completely synchronized, different initial value random numbers are provided to the various production random numbers instead of making the maximum values of the various random number ranges different, When updating the random number, if the random value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, each random value may be newly updated from the initial random number at that time.

(Timer interrupt processing by production control board)
The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 33 is executed by generating a clock pulse every predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the effect control board 102.

  First, in step S1100, the sub CPU 102a saves information stored in the register of the sub CPU 102a to the stack area.

  In step S1200, the sub CPU 102a performs time control processing for updating each timer counter for performing time management related to various effects.

  In step S1300, the sub CPU 102a performs command analysis processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 102a performs processing for analyzing a command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 34 to 49.

  When the effect control board 102 receives the command transmitted from the main control board 101, the effect control board 102 performs a reception interrupt process of the effect control board 102 (not shown) and stores the received command in the reception buffer. Thereafter, processing for analyzing the received command is performed in step S1300.

  In step S1400, the sub CPU 102a performs a general symbol system effect control process for controlling a roulette effect (ordinary effect) for notifying the result of stopping the normal symbol and suggesting the degree of expectation that the special symbol is a big hit.

  In step S1500, the sub CPU 102a performs a customer waiting effect control process for controlling the customer waiting effect performed in the customer waiting state.

  In step S1600, the sub CPU 102a checks an input signal from the effect button detection switch 18a or the selection button detection switch 19a, and performs an effect input control process based on an operation on the effect button 18A or the selection button 19A.

  In step S1700, the sub CPU 102a performs data output processing for transmitting various effect control commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

  In step S1800, the sub CPU 102a restores the information saved in step S1100 to the register of the sub CPU 102a.

(Command analysis processing by production control board)
The command analysis processing by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35.

  In step S1301, the sub CPU 102a newly receives a command and determines whether the command is stored in the reception buffer. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1302.

  In step S1302, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command, it moves the process to step S1303. If it determines that the command is not a customer waiting state designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1303-1.

  In step S1303, the sub CPU 102a performs customer waiting effect preparation processing, and ends this command analysis processing. In the customer waiting effect preparation process, the sub CPU 102a turns on the customer waiting effect waiting flag in the customer waiting effect flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and waits until the customer waiting effect starts (customer waiting effect waiting time: for example, 30 seconds) is set in the customer waiting effect timer counter.

  The sub CPU 102a determines in the customer waiting effect control process in step S1500 whether or not the customer waiting effect waiting time set in the customer waiting effect timer counter has elapsed, and determines that the customer waiting effect waiting time has elapsed. Then, the customer waiting effect standby flag is turned OFF and the customer waiting effect execution flag is turned ON, and a customer waiting effect control command indicating the effect information of the customer waiting effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The set customer waiting effect control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the customer waiting effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 repeatedly execute the customer waiting effect for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) based on the command. The execution and standby of the customer waiting effect are ended based on a game state designation command, a special symbol designation command, a special figure variation pattern designation command, etc. transmitted from the main control board 101 to the presentation control board 102.

  In step S1303-1, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol storage designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol storage designation command, it moves the process to step S1303-2. If it determines that the command is not a special symbol storage designation command, it moves the process to step S1304.

  In step S <b> 1303-2, the sub CPU 102 a updates the number of special figure reservations according to the special symbol storage designation command, shifts the hold icon displayed on the image display device 14 in response to the special figure reservation number, or creates a new one. A hold information update process such as adding a hold icon is performed, and the command analysis process is terminated. The hold information update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1304, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a start slot winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a start opening winning designation command, it moves the process to step S1305, and if it determines that the command is not a starting opening winning designation command, it moves the process to step S1305-1.

  In step S1305, the sub CPU 102a performs a so-called pre-reading notice such as a pre-reading zone effect (continuous notice effect) or a hold icon change notice, which is executed over the variable display (variable effect) of one or more special symbols based on the prior determination result. The start opening winning process for determining the (effect) is performed, and the command analysis process is terminated. The start opening winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In addition, as a continuous notice effect, a countdown notice effect that performs a countdown display on the image display device 14 for each variation effect, a continuous cut-in notice effect that performs a cut-in display of a notice image on the image display device 14 for each variation effect, and each variation effect In addition, a continuous step-up notice effect that performs step-up display of the notice image on the image display device 14 and a chance eye notice effect that stops the effect symbols (decorative symbols TZ1 to TZ3) in an array having a predetermined regularity for each variation effect. Etc. may be executed.

  In step S1305-1, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command, it moves the process to step S1305-2, and if it determines that the command is not a gaming state designation command, it moves the process to step S1306.

  In step S1305-2, the sub CPU 102a performs a gaming state designation command analysis process for determining an abnormality in the gaming state designation command or updating the gaming state, and ends the command analysis process. The game state designation command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1306, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect designating command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect designating command, it moves the process to step S1307, and if it determines that the command is not an effect designating command, it moves the process to step S1308.

  In step S1307, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect symbol designation command analysis process for determining an abnormality in the effect symbol designation command and storing the effect symbol designation command, and ends the command analysis process. The effect symbol designation command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1308, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure variation pattern designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure variation pattern designation command, it moves the process to step S1309-1. If it determines that the command is not a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to step S1313. Move.

  In step S1309-1, the sub CPU 102a performs a special figure variation pattern designation command analysis process for determining abnormality of the special figure variation pattern designation command and storing the special figure variation pattern designation command. The special figure variation pattern designation command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1309-2, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect restriction that is set to ON or OFF depending on the presence / absence of a gaming state designation command, an effect symbol designation command, and a special figure variation pattern designation command (missing, missing bits, command contradiction, etc.). It is determined whether or not the flag is ON (command abnormal), and if it is determined that the effect restriction flag is not ON (command has been received normally), the process proceeds to step S1309-3, and the effect restriction flag is ON. If it is determined that the command has not been received normally, the command analysis processing is terminated.

  In step S1309-3, the sub CPU 102a configures a special drawing lottery effect, and displays the image display device 14 as a result of the changing effect (including the changing display of the effect symbol) performed when the special symbol is changed. An effect design stop display pattern determination process for determining an effect design to be stopped, that is, an arrangement (combination) of decorative symbols to be stopped on a predetermined effective line is performed. The effect symbol stop display pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1310, the sub CPU 102a constitutes a special drawing lottery effect, and the variation that is the effect content (mode) of the variation effect (including the variation display of the effect symbol) performed when the special symbol variation display is performed. A variation effect pattern determination process for determining an effect pattern is performed. The variation effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S <b> 1311, the sub CPU 102 a performs prefetch zone effect start determination processing for determining whether or not to start a prefetch zone effect that is a kind of prefetch notice (effect) based on the prior determination result. The prefetch zone effect start determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1312, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not to change the hold icon and the changing icon (hereinafter simply referred to as the “icon” when referring to both the hold icon and the changing icon) displayed on the image display device 14. The icon change notice determination process is performed, and this command analysis process ends. The icon change notice determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1313, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure fluctuation stop designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure fluctuation stop designation command, it moves the process to step S1314. If it determines that there is no special figure fluctuation stop designation command, it moves the process to step S1316. .

  In step S1314, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect symbol stop control command indicating that the effect symbol change display is stopped and the effect symbol stop display is performed in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c as the effect symbol change stop process. The effect symbol fluctuation stop control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700. The lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect symbol stop control command, recognize that the variation effect is ended, end the variation effect, and perform stop display of the effect symbol.

  In step S1315, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect mode setting process for setting the effect mode when the special symbol variation display ends, and ends the command analysis process. The effect mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the present embodiment, the effect mode is a variation effect classification mode (category) performed by an effect device such as the image display device 14 in response to a special symbol lottery (or a special symbol variable display). It is related to the state of the game condition and the like.
Describe.

  In step S1316, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a jackpot game opening designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a jackpot game opening designation command, it moves the process to step S1317, and if it determines that there is no jackpot game opening designation command, it moves the process to step S1318.

  In step S1317, the sub CPU 102a performs a jackpot game effect pattern determination process for determining a jackpot game effect pattern, which is an effect mode of the jackpot game effect performed during the opening of the jackpot game, and ends the command analysis process.

  In step S1318, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command, it moves the process to step S1319. If it determines that there is no round designation command, it moves the process to step S1320.

  In step S1319, the sub CPU 102a performs a round effect pattern determination process for determining a round effect pattern that is a mode of a round effect performed during the round of the jackpot game, and ends the command analysis process. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines a round effect pattern based on the round designation command, sets round effect data indicating the determined round effect pattern in the round effect pattern storage area, and indicates the determined round effect pattern. The round effect control command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1320, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a jackpot game ending designation command (jackpot game ending designation command). If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a jackpot game ending designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1321, and if it determines that the command is not a jackpot game ending designation command, ends the command analysis process.

  In step S1321, the sub CPU 102a performs a jackpot game ending effect pattern determining process for determining an ending effect pattern which is an effect mode of the ending effect performed during the jackpot game ending, and ends the command analysis process.

  In step S1322, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal pattern change pattern designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a common map variation pattern designation command, it moves the process to step S1323, and if it determines that the command is not a common map variation pattern designation command, it moves the process to step S1324.

  In step S1323, the sub CPU 102a performs a general drawing effect execution determination process for determining whether or not to execute a general drawing effect described later, and ends the command analysis process. The ordinary drawing execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1324, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an auxiliary game opening designation command (auxiliary game opening designation command). If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is an auxiliary game opening designation command, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to step S1325. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command is not an auxiliary game opening designation command, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis process. .

  In step S1325, the sub CPU 102a performs a long opening effect execution determination process for determining whether or not to execute a long opening effect corresponding to the auxiliary game (second auxiliary game) related to the hit 2 in the non-time-saving gaming state. The command analysis process ends. The long opening effect execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Holding information update process by production control board)
The hold information update process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-2-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the current number of special figure reservations, and in step S1303-2-2, depending on the special symbol storage designation command, the first special figure reservation number (U1) or second The special figure hold number (U2) is updated.

  In step S1303-2-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the special figure holding number (U1, U2) has decreased, and determines that the special figure holding number has decreased, step S1303-2-4. If it is determined that the number of special figure hold has not decreased, the process proceeds to step S1303-2-8 because the special figure hold number has increased.

  In step S <b> 1303-2-4, the sub CPU 102 a shifts the effect information stored in the effect information hold storage area corresponding to the reduced number of special figure reservations (starting port). Specifically, each data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit. For example, the data stored in the fourth storage unit of the first effect information hold storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first effect information hold storage area. Further, the data stored in the first storage unit of the first effect information hold storage area is used as the variable effect information storage area (the 0th memory) common to the first effect information hold storage area and the second effect information hold storage area. And the data stored in the variable effect information storage area are deleted.

  In step S1303-2-5, the sub CPU 102a subsends a hold icon shift control command (first hold display shift control command or second hold display shift control command) indicating the type of the reduced special figure hold number (starting port). Set in the transmission buffer of the RAM 102c.

  The hold icon shift control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. When the image control board 105 receives the hold icon shift control command, the image control board 105 performs a shift process for shifting the hold icon related to the start port indicated by the received hold icon shift control command toward the changing icon display area described later.

  In step S1303-2-6, the sub CPU 102a confirms the icon display mode scenario data (details will be described later) stored in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and uses the already displayed icons for the hold to be performed. If it is determined whether there is an icon that changes the display mode (executes the hold icon change notice) according to the shift of the icon (execution of variation effect), and if there is an icon that changes the display mode, If the process moves to S1303-2-7 and it is determined that there is no icon for changing the display mode, the on-hold information update process is terminated.

  In step S1303-2-7, the sub CPU 102a sets, in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, an icon change control command indicating the change content according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the icon display mode scenario data related to the icon whose display mode is to be changed. To do. Here, “change contents according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the icon display mode scenario data” includes an icon to be changed in display mode and a display mode to be changed.

  The icon change control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. Upon receiving the icon shift control command, the image control board 105 changes the icon display mode according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the received icon change control command, along with the shift of the hold icon related to the hold icon shift process.

  In step S1303-2-8, the sub CPU 102a adds a hold icon based on the increase in the special figure hold number and transmits a hold icon addition control command indicating the type of the increased special figure hold number (starting port) to the sub RAM 102c. Set in the buffer and end the pending information update process.

  The hold icon addition control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. Upon receiving the hold icon addition control command, the image control board 105 additionally displays a hold icon corresponding to the start port indicated by the received hold addition control command.

(Processing at the start opening prize by the production control board)
With reference to FIG. 37, the start opening winning process by the effect control board 102 will be described.

  In the start opening prize process, predetermined matters such as pre-read zone effects, contents of effects related to the hold icon display and the changing icon display, which are performed based on the prior determination result indicated by the start opening prize designation command, and the like are determined. Here, the pre-read zone effect, the hold icon display, and the changing icon display that are the targets of the start opening winning prize process will be described.

  First, the prefetch zone effect will be described. A look-ahead zone effect is a look-ahead notice that suggests the possibility of winning a jackpot and / or the expectation of winning a jackpot over one or more variation effects (variable display of special symbols) In the present embodiment, it is an effect that can be executed in the effect mode A, and is performed based on a prior determination result indicated by the start opening prize designation command.

  While the pre-reading zone effect is being executed, a background image dedicated to the pre-reading zone effect is displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 (there is an unillustrated portion), and a BGM dedicated to the pre-reading zone effect is displayed in the audio output device 15. The lighting effect is executed in a manner dedicated to the pre-reading zone effect in the effect lighting device 16.

  In addition, as an effect related to the pre-reading zone effect, a zone turning effect is provided. The zone-rolling effect is an effect that tells whether or not the look-ahead zone effect is executed. In the change display and stop display of the effect symbol, a special effect symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol”) dedicated to the zone effect effect is displayed. Done with. In this embodiment, the zone ringing effect is performed using a special symbol, but it is not a dedicated symbol for the zone ringing effect, but it can also be performed using a special symbol different from the normal one. In addition, it is also possible to stop and display a chance (a combination of predetermined effect symbols) with a normal effect symbol. Furthermore, the zone turning effect can be performed using other effect images (characters, etc.) instead of the effect symbol, and other effect devices (for example, the audio output device 15 and the effect) that are not the image display device 14. For example, by causing the lighting device 16 or the like) to perform a certain aspect of the effect.

  In the present embodiment, as a type of zone turning effect, a zone turning success effect and a zone turning failure effect are provided. The zone-rolling success effect is composed of an effect that tells whether or not the pre-reading zone effect is executed and an effect that notifies that the pre-reading zone effect is executed after the effect. In the zone-rolling success effect, a plurality of preset special symbols are stopped and displayed, and when all the preset special symbols are aligned, it is notified that the prefetch zone effect is executed. In the present embodiment, the pre-read zone effect is executed from the start of the change display (change effect) of the effect symbol that is started after the zone-turning success effect is executed.

  On the other hand, the zone-rolling failure effect is composed of an effect that tells whether or not the pre-read zone effect is executed and an effect that informs that the pre-read zone effect after the effect is not executed. In the zone turning failure effect, only a part of a plurality of preset special symbols is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the pre-read zone effect is not executed when all the preset special symbols are not arranged. In the present embodiment, the prefetch zone effect is not executed in the variation display (variation effect) of the effect symbol that is started after the zone-turning failure effect is executed. However, in the variation display (variation production) of the production symbol that is started after the zone production failure production is executed, the zone production success production can be executed. In this case, the zone production success production is executed. The pre-reading zone effect is executed from the start of the variation display (variation effect) of the effect symbol that is started after.

  In this embodiment, when the pre-read zone effect is executed, the zone-turning success effect is always executed before the execution. It is also possible to execute the look-ahead zone effect suddenly at the start or midway of the effect).

  In the present embodiment, as a special symbol used for the zone-turning effect, a special symbol including the characters “prefetch” (referred to as “prefetch” symbol) and a special symbol including the characters “zone” (“zone”). And a special symbol including the characters “rush” (referred to as “rush” symbol). Zone special effects in which all of these “pre-read” symbols, “zone” symbols, and “inrush” symbols are stopped and displayed are “zone-successful directing effects”. These “pre-read” symbols, “zone” symbols The zone turning effect in which some special symbols of the “rush” symbol are stopped and displayed is the “zone turning failure effect”. The zone-rolling failure effect is a zone where the “pre-read” symbol and the “zone” symbol are stopped and displayed as some special symbols, and the “pre-read” symbol is only stopped and displayed as some special symbols. It consists of a roar failure production 2.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbols are stopped one by one. For example, in a zone-successful production, the “look ahead” symbol stops first, then the “zone” symbol stops, and finally the “rush” symbol decelerates and stops. All the special symbols are arranged by stopping the symbols at preset stop positions. The period from when the “prefetch” symbol is first stopped to when the “rush” symbol is stopped last constitutes an effect as to whether or not the prefetch zone effect is executed.

  On the other hand, in the zone hit failure production, for example, the “look ahead” symbol stops first, then the “zone” symbol stops, and finally the “rush” symbol stops while decelerating. Then, it slides past a preset stop position, and as a result, only some special symbols are arranged. The period from when the “prefetch” symbol is first stopped until the “rush” symbol slips constitutes an effect as to whether or not the prefetch zone effect is executed.

  In this embodiment, as a mode of “all special symbols are aligned”, “look ahead” symbol, “zone” symbol and “rush” symbol are gradually stopped, but all these special symbols are simultaneously aligned. In other words, it is possible to make all the special symbols suddenly align without performing the effect of whether or not the prefetch zone effect is executed.

  Next, the hold icon display and the changing icon display will be described. The hold icon display is to display a hold icon in a first hold icon display area 141 and a second hold icon display area 143 described later. In the hold icon, the special symbol determination information is stored in the main RAM 101c in the first start port detection signal input process in step S230 or the second start port detection signal input process in step S240, and the special symbol variation display (or the special symbol lottery) ), But it is in a suspended state that cannot immediately start the variable display of the special symbol, so the right to execute the variable display of the special symbol in the reserved state (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol pending”) ) And is displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

  The hold icon is a first hold icon representing the right to execute the variable display of the first special symbol based on the winning at the first starting port 6 and the variable display of the second special symbol based on the winning at the second starting port 7 (Hereinafter referred to simply as “hold icon” when referring to both the first hold icon and the second hold icon).

  The changing icon display is to display a changing icon in a changing icon display area 142 described later. The changing icon is an icon (image) representing a changing display of the special symbol being executed corresponding to the special symbol determination information stored in the storage area of the special symbol of the main RAM 101c, and is the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. Is displayed. In other words, when the hold icon is displayed, if the start condition of the symbol variation display is established for the special figure hold indicated by the hold icon, this corresponds to the symbol variation display related to the establishment of the start condition. The hold icon is displayed as a floating icon.

  In the following, when both the held icon and the changing icon are indicated, they are simply referred to as “icons”.

  In the present embodiment, a normal mode and a special mode are set as icon display modes. The normal mode is a standard display mode for icons, and the special mode is a special display mode that suggests or notifies predetermined items set in advance. In the present embodiment, one type of normal mode is set, and the special mode is classified into a plurality of types depending on the content to be suggested or notified. In the present embodiment, the special modes are classified into a first special mode, a second special mode, a third special mode, and a fourth special mode, and the hold icon is displayed in a special mode or the type of the special mode is displayed. By changing the hold icon change notice as a pre-read notice effect is executed, the changing icon is displayed in a special form, or the changing icon type notice is executed by changing the type of the special form. The icon display mode is not limited to these normal mode, first special mode, second special mode, third special mode, and fourth special mode, and can be set as appropriate.

  The normal mode is a standard display mode and is a standard for predetermined items set in advance. As shown in FIG. 74, the shape of the normal mode icon is circular, and the color of the normal mode icon is white.

  The first special mode is a display mode that suggests that there is a possibility of winning the jackpot and / or the expectation degree of the jackpot win, and can be said to be a display mode that suggests the possibility of changing to another special mode, In the present embodiment, only one type is set. As shown in FIG. 74, the icon of the icon of the first special mode is a circle, and the color of the icon of the first special mode is blinking white. That is, the first special mode can be said to be a state in which the normal mode is blinking. Note that the expectation degree for winning a jackpot suggested by the first special mode is the normal mode <the first special mode.

  The second special mode is a display mode that indicates the possibility of winning the jackpot and / or the expectation level of the jackpot winning. In the present embodiment, as the type of the second special mode, the expected jackpot winning expectation level 5 types of the second special mode 21 to the second special mode 25 different from each other are set.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the icons of the second special mode 11 to the second special mode 15 are the same in the silhouette of one person regardless of the type, and the second special mode 11 to the second special mode. About the color of 15 icons, it changes with kinds. Specifically, the icon color of the second special mode 11 is white, the color of the icon of the second special mode 12 is green, the color of the icon of the second special mode 13 is red, and the color of the icon of the second special mode 14 Is a zebra pattern, and the color of the icon of the second special mode 15 is rainbow.

  Regarding the jackpot winning expectation degree related to the second special mode, the normal mode <the first special mode <the second special mode 11 <the second special mode 12 <the second special mode 13 <the second special mode 14 <the second special mode 15 It becomes higher in order. Note that the second special mode 15 suggests that the degree of expectation of winning the big hit is 100%, that is, the big win winning is notified.

  In addition, the second special mode 11 to the second special mode 14 can occur for both the hold icon and the changing icon, but the second special mode 15 occurs only for the changing icon. This is because if the hold icon representing the special figure hold is displayed in the second special mode 15 and the notification of the jackpot winning is informed at the stage where the change display of the special symbol related to the special figure hold is not started, the interest of the game is lowered. Since there is a fear, the second special mode 15 is not generated for the hold icon. However, the matter can be set as appropriate, and the hold icon can also be displayed in the second special mode 15.

  The third special mode suggests an expectation for execution of the prefetch zone effect (hereinafter referred to as “prefetch zone execution expectation”). As the types of the third special mode, six types of the third special mode 1 to the third special mode 6 having different suggested prefetch effect execution expectation levels are set.

  Here, the third special mode 1 to the third special mode 3 are icons corresponding to the start opening winning designation command that causes the pre-read zone effect or the zone turning effect to be executed (hereinafter referred to as “zone effect target icon”). The third special mode 4 to the third special mode 6 are icons that are not icons corresponding to the start opening prize designation command that causes the pre-read zone effect or the zone turning effect to be executed (hereinafter, “zone”). This is a display mode of “effect non-target icon”. In other words, the zone effect non-target icon is an icon (previous to the start opening prize designation command before or after the icon corresponding to the start opening prize designation command that causes the pre-read zone effect or the zone turning effect to be executed. Or an icon for which a variation effect is executed later).

  As shown in FIG. 75, the icon shape of the third special mode 1 to the third special mode 3 is a shape including the icon shape according to the second special mode. Specifically, the icon shape of the third special mode 1 (11 to 15) has the silhouette of one person on each of the left side and the right side of the single person's silhouette according to the second special mode. At the same time, a character indicating the execution of the pre-read zone effect, “? The icon shape of the third special mode 2 (21 to 25) is that the silhouettes of two people are arranged on the left side and the right side of the silhouette of one person according to the second special mode, respectively, and a substantially central portion. Are marked with “Δ zone Δ” and a character indicating that the pre-read zone effect is executed and that the expected degree of execution is higher than “? Zone?” Of the third special mode 1. The icon shape of the third special mode 3 (31 to 35) is such that the silhouettes of four people are arranged on the left side and the right side of the silhouette of one person according to the second special mode, respectively, and a substantially central portion. Is attached with a character for notifying the execution of the pre-read zone effect “○ zone ○”.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 76, the icon shapes of the third special mode 4 to the third special mode 6 also have a shape including the icon shape according to the second special mode. Specifically, the icon shape of the third special mode 4 (41 to 45) includes a single person silhouette on each of the left and right sides of the single person silhouette according to the second special mode. It has a configuration. The icon shape of the third special mode 5 (51 to 55) is configured such that the silhouettes of two people are arranged on the left and right sides of the silhouette of one person according to the second special mode. . The shape of the icon of the third special mode 6 (61 to 65) is such that the silhouettes of three people are arranged on the left and right sides of the silhouette of one person according to the second special mode. . In the third special mode 4 to the third special mode 6, unlike the third special mode 1 to the third special mode 3, characters such as “? Zone?” Are not attached. That is, it is also suggested that “? Zone?” In the third special mode 1, “Δ zone Δ” in the third special mode 2, and “○ zone ○” in the third special mode 3 are the zone effect target icons. ing.

  About the prefetch zone execution expectation degree which concerns on a zone production | presentation object icon, it becomes high in order of (normal aspect <) 2nd special aspect <3 special aspect 1 <3 special aspect 2 <3 special aspect 3. On the other hand, the prefetch zone execution expectation degree related to the zone effect non-target icon increases in the order of (normal mode <) second special mode <third special mode 4 <third special mode 5 <third special mode 6). Yes.

  Here, the second special mode is included with respect to the pre-read zone execution expectation level related to the zone effect target icon and the zone effect non-target icon. This is because the icon display mode is set to the second special mode and the third special mode. This is because a zone precursor effect that suggests or notifies the execution of a prefetch zone effect, which will be described later, is executed, and the second special mode also suggests a prefetch zone execution expectation.

  As described above, the icon shapes of the second special mode and the third special mode include the silhouettes of people. The number of silhouettes of the icons of the second special mode is “1”, and the third special mode 1 The number of silhouettes of the icons of 4 is “3”, the number of silhouettes of the icons of the third special modes 2 and 5 is “5”, and the number of silhouettes of the icons of the third special modes 3 and 6 Has "7" people. The more the number of icon silhouettes is, the higher the expectation of execution of the look-ahead zone is.

  In the present embodiment, each of the third special mode 1 and the third special mode 4, the third special mode 2 and the third special mode 5, the third special mode 3 and the third special mode 6 is the display mode. The attributes of the target icons are different (zone effect target icons and zone effect non-target icons), but they have a corresponding relationship, and the same prefetch zone execution expectation is set. That is, the prefetch zone execution expectation degree suggested by the third special aspect 1 is the same as the prefetch zone execution expectation degree suggested by the third special aspect 4, and the prefetch zone execution expectation degree suggested by the third special aspect 2 The prefetch zone execution expectation degree suggested by the third special aspect 5 is the same, and the prefetch zone execution expectation degree suggested by the third special aspect 3 and the prefetch zone execution expectation degree suggested by the third special aspect 6 are the same. .

  The third special modes 3 and 6 suggest that the prefetch zone execution expectation is 100%, that is, notify that the prefetch zone effect is executed. Although details will be described later, the icons are displayed in the third special modes 3 and 6 even when the prefetch zone effect is executed. Therefore, the third special modes 3 and 6 may notify that the prefetch zone effect is being executed.

  In the following, the third special modes 1 and 4 are referred to as “prefetch zone effect suggesting mode 1”, the third special modes 2 and 5 are referred to as “prefetch zone effect suggesting mode 2”, and the third special mode. Aspects 3 and 6 are referred to as “prefetch zone effect informing modes”. Further, when both the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 1 and the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 2 are indicated, it is simply referred to as “prefetch zone effect suggestion mode”.

  In addition, as described above, the shape of the icon according to the third special mode is composed of a person's silhouette and includes the silhouette of one person according to the second special mode. The part of the silhouette of one person according to the above is the main silhouette part, and the part of the silhouette of the person on the left side and the right side of the main silhouette part is the sub silhouette part.

  And about the main silhouette part of the icon which concerns on each of the 3rd special mode 1-the 3rd special mode 6, the multiple types of color is set similarly to the 2nd special mode. According to the color of the main silhouette part, the third special mode 1 is divided into a third special mode 11 to a third special mode 15, and the third special mode 2 is divided into a third special mode 21 to a third special mode 25. The third special mode 3 is divided into a third special mode 31 to a third special mode 35, the third special mode 4 is divided into a third special mode 41 to a third special mode 45, and the third special mode 5 is The third special mode 51 is divided into the third special mode 55 and the third special mode 55 is divided into the third special mode 61 and the third special mode 65.

  The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special aspect 11, the third special aspect 21, the third special aspect 31, the third special aspect 41, the third special aspect 51, and the third special aspect 61 is white. The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special aspect 12, the third special aspect 22, the third special aspect 32, the third special aspect 42, the third special aspect 52, and the third special aspect 62 is green. The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special aspect 13, the third special aspect 23, the third special aspect 33, the third special aspect 43, the third special aspect 53, and the third special aspect 63 is red. The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special aspect 14, the third special aspect 24, the third special aspect 34, the third special aspect 44, the third special aspect 54 and the third special aspect 64 is a zebra pattern. The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special aspect 35 and the third special aspect 65 is iridescent. Similar to the second special mode, the color of the main silhouette portion of the third special mode suggests the big win winning expectation, and increases in the order of white <green <red <zebra pattern <rainbow color.

  On the other hand, the 4th special mode suggests or notifies the predetermined matter regarding handshake meeting notice. The handshake event notice is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of winning a big hit using a changing icon, and in this embodiment, it can be executed in the effect mode A and is based on a pre-determination result indicated by the start opening prize designation command. However, the determination may be made based on the determination result at the start of the variation effect. Specific contents of the handshake meeting notice will be described later.

  As the types of the fourth special mode, four types of the fourth special mode 1 to the fourth special mode 4 are set. Here, in the fourth special mode 1 (11 to 15), a changing icon corresponding to the start opening prize designation command that causes the handshake meeting notice to be executed (hereinafter referred to as a “changing icon for the handshake meeting notice target”). The fourth special mode 2 (21 to 24) is a hold icon (hereinafter referred to as a “shake event notice target hold icon”) corresponding to the start opening prize designation command that causes the handshake meeting notice to be executed. ) Is displayed, and the fourth special mode 3 (31) is a variable icon (hereinafter, “shake handshake”) corresponding to a start opening prize designation command that is not a start opening prize designation command that causes the handshake meeting notice to be executed. The 4th special mode 4 (41) is a start opening prize finger that is not a start opening winning designation command that causes a handshake meeting advance notice to be executed. Hold icon corresponding to the command (hereinafter, referred to as a "handshake meeting notice non-target Hold icon") is a display mode of.

  In other words, the handshake meeting notice non-target hold icon is the icon (before or after) corresponding to the start opening prize designation command before or after the icon corresponding to the start opening prize designation command that causes the handshake meeting notice to be executed. This is an icon for executing a variation effect).

  As shown in FIG. 77, the shape of the changing icon of the fourth special mode 1 is composed of a silhouette of a person shaking hands as viewed from the side and a heart attached to the chest around the silhouette. Yes. The shape of the hold icon in the fourth special mode 2 includes a silhouette of a person who has taken a predetermined pose as viewed from the front, and a heart attached to the chest around the silhouette. “Heart” attached in common to the icons of the fourth special mode 1 and the fourth special mode 2 indicates that the handshake event is to be notified.

  The shape of the changing icon in the fourth special mode 3 is composed of the same silhouette of the person as the changing icon in the fourth special mode 1, and a heart is attached as in the fourth special mode 1. Absent. The shape of the hold icon of the fourth special mode 4 is also composed of the same silhouette of the person as the hold icon according to the fourth special mode 2, and no heart is attached as in the fourth special mode 2.

  Moreover, about the part of the person's silhouette contained in the icon of the 4th special aspect 1-the 4th special aspect 2, the multiple types of color is set similarly to the 2nd special aspect. According to the color of the silhouette portion, the fourth special mode 1 is divided into five types of the fourth special mode 11 to the fourth special mode 15, and the fourth special mode 2 is the fourth special mode 21 to the fourth special mode 24. It is divided into four types.

  The color of the silhouette part of the icon according to the fourth special aspect 11 and the fourth special aspect 21 is white, the color of the silhouette part of the icon according to the fourth special aspect 12 and the fourth special aspect 22 is green, The color of the silhouette part of the icon according to the special aspect 13 and the fourth special aspect 23 is red, and the color of the silhouette part of the icon according to the fourth special aspect 14 and the fourth special aspect 24 is a zebra pattern. The color of the silhouette portion of the icon according to aspect 15 is rainbow.

  The reason why the rainbow color is set only in the fourth special mode 1 is that the handshake meeting notice target hold icon is displayed in rainbow color, and the special symbol change display related to the special figure hold corresponding to the icon has not started. This is because if the big win is announced at the stage, the interest of the game may be reduced. However, the matter can be set as appropriate, and a rainbow-colored display mode can be provided for the handshake meeting advance notice target hold icon.

  Further, in this embodiment, the colors related to the non-target change icon for the handshake meeting notice and the asymmetric hold icon for the handshake meeting notice are one type of white. Similarly to the hold icon for the handshake event notice, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot by the color.

  As described above, the normal mode and the special mode are set as the display mode of the icon, and the display mode of the icon is changed from the normal mode to the special mode during the game, or from a certain special mode to a different special mode. In this way, the interest of the game is improved. The change pattern of the icon display mode will be described later.

  Next, an area for displaying the hold icon and an area for displaying the changing icon will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the hold icon and the changing icon are displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

  In the display unit 140, a first hold icon display area 141 where the first hold icon is displayed, a changing icon display area 142 where the changing icon is displayed, and a second hold icon display where the second hold icon is displayed. The region 143 is formed so as not to overlap each other.

  The first hold icon display area 141 is divided into a first display unit 141a, a second display unit 141b, a third display unit 141c, and a fourth display unit 141d. Each display part 141a-141d respond | corresponds to the 1st memory | storage part-the 4th memory | storage part of the 1st special symbol holding | maintenance storage area of main RAM101c.

  Therefore, the 1st hold icon displayed on the 1st display part 141a represents the special figure hold based on the special figure determination information memorize | stored in the 1st memory | storage part of a 1st special symbol reservation memory area, and the 2nd display part 141b The first hold icon displayed on the screen represents the special figure hold based on the special figure determination information stored in the second storage unit of the first special symbol hold storage area, and the first hold icon displayed on the third display unit 141c The icon represents special figure hold based on special figure determination information stored in the third storage unit of the first special symbol hold storage area, and the first hold icon displayed on the fourth display unit 141d is the first special symbol. Represents special figure hold based on special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the hold storage area.

  The second hold icon display area 143 is divided into a first display unit 143a, a second display unit 143b, a third display unit 143c, and a fourth display unit 143d. Each display part 143a-143d respond | corresponds to the 1st memory | storage part-4th memory | storage part of the 2nd special symbol holding | maintenance storage area of main RAM101c.

  Therefore, the 2nd reservation icon displayed on the 1st display part 143a represents the special figure reservation based on the special figure determination information memorize | stored in the 1st memory | storage part of a 2nd special symbol reservation storage area, and the 2nd display part 143b The second hold icon displayed on the screen represents the special figure hold based on the special figure determination information stored in the second storage unit of the second special symbol hold storage area, and the second hold icon displayed on the third display unit 143c The icon represents special figure hold based on special figure determination information stored in the third storage unit of the second special symbol hold storage area, and the second hold icon displayed on the fourth display unit 143d is the second special symbol Represents special figure hold based on special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the hold storage area.

  Further, the changing icon displayed in the changing icon display area 142 represents the changing display of the special symbol currently being executed based on the special symbol determination information stored in the special symbol storage area (the 0th storage unit). .

  Note that the changing icon display area 142 in which the changing icon is displayed is provided on the pedestal image D in order to clearly distinguish it from the first holding icon display area 141 and the second holding icon display area 143. In addition, the broken line part in FIG. 78 is for showing each display part and display area, and although it is not actually displayed, you may make it display.

  Next, basic hold icon display and changing icon display will be described using specific examples. Note that, as a premise, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the display of the decorative symbols TZ1 to TZ3 constituting the effect symbol is being executed (variable display of the special symbol), and a normal mode is displayed in the changing icon display area 142. And the normal hold icons A01 and A02 are displayed on the first display portion 141a and the second display portion 141b of the first hold icon display area 141.

  Here, when the game ball enters the first start port 6 and the special figure determination information is stored in the third storage unit of the first special symbol holding storage area, and the first special figure holding occurs, FIG. As shown in b), the hold icon of the normal mode representing the first special figure hold is displayed on the third display unit 141c.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 78 (c), when the special symbol change display is finished and the special symbol stop display is performed, when the decorative symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are stopped and displayed, the change is displayed. The changing icon A00 displayed in the middle icon display area 142 is deleted.

  Then, in response to the shift of the special figure determination information to start the next special symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 78 (d), the hold icons A01 to A13 are shifted, and the special symbol variation is performed. In response to the start of display, the decorative symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in a variable manner. Here, the hold icon A01 displayed on the first display unit 141a before the shift is shifted to the changing icon display area 142 by the shift, and the second display unit 141b and the third display unit 141c are shifted before the shift. The hold icons A01 and A02 displayed on are shifted to the first display unit 141a and the second display unit 141b, respectively.

  In this way, the icon display is updated in response to the occurrence of the special symbol hold, the end of the special symbol variation display, and the start of the special symbol variation display.

  Next, a control flow will be described for the start opening winning process. In step S1305-1, the sub CPU 102a stores the start opening winning designation command determined to have been received in step S1304 in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (a), the effect information hold storage area includes a first effect information hold storage area in which a first start opening winning designation command is stored, and a second start information winning hold designation command is stored. The production information hold storage area and the production information related storage area for storing the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display (fluctuation production) currently being performed. Has been.

  The first effect information hold storage area and the second effect information hold storage area are the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, like the first special figure hold storage area and the second special figure hold storage area of the main RAM 101c. It is divided into. The first start opening prize designation command and the second start opening prize designation command are transmitted from a storage unit having a smaller number in the storage unit in which the start opening prize designation command is not stored in the corresponding first effect information hold storage area. It is memorized in order. It should be noted that the production information in which the first start opening prize designation command and the second start opening prize designation command are stored is handled as the 0th storage section for convenience.

  Each storage unit represents a start opening prize designation command area in which a start opening prize designation command is stored, a prefetch zone production scenario area in which prefetch zone production scenario data representing a prefetch zone production scenario described later is stored, and a precursor production scenario. It includes a precursor effect scenario area for storing precursor effect scenario data and an icon display aspect scenario region for storing icon display aspect scenario data representing an icon display aspect scenario.

  In step S1305-2, the sub CPU 102a acquires the icon display mode scenario determination random number indicated by the icon display mode scenario determination random number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c, and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1305-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not an effect mode A that is a normal effect mode is currently set. In the present embodiment, three types of effect modes, effect mode A, effect mode B, and effect mode C, are provided as effect modes.

  The production mode A is a normal production mode set in correspondence with the low probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state. The effect mode B is an effect mode that represents the most advantageous game state that is set in accordance with the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state after the probability variation length or the probability variation short hit.

  The production mode C is set corresponding to a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state, or a low-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state that occurs after winning per high-probability short-lived length or low-probability short-lived length. This is an effect mode in which it is difficult or impossible to recognize whether the game state is the low probability game state or the high probability game state.

  If the sub CPU 102a determines in step S1305-3 that the effect mode A is not set, the process proceeds to step S1305-4, and if it is determined in step S1305-3 that the effect mode A is set, the process proceeds to step S1305-5. Move processing.

  In step S1305-5, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the display mode of the icon that is already displayed at this time is a pre-read zone effect notification mode or a pre-read zone effect suggestion mode, in other words, a zone precursor effect is executed. It is determined whether or not.

  The zone sign effect is an effect for suggesting or notifying the execution of the prefetch zone effect, and is performed by displaying an icon in the above-described prefetch zone effect notification mode or the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode. It is determined whether or not the zone precursor effect is executed based on the preliminary determination result indicated by the start opening prize designation command, and when the start opening prize designation command is stored, in other words, the start opening prize designation command is displayed. It can be executed during the period from the occurrence of the corresponding special figure hold to the end of the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the special figure hold. Even if the zone sign effect is executed, the prefetch zone effect may not be executed. In the following, the zone precursor effect in this case is referred to as “gasse zone precursor effect”. Further, as the gaze zone sign effect, the zone turn failure effect is executed after the zone sign effect is executed, but the prefetch zone effect may not be executed. Furthermore, although the zone warning effect is executed as the gasse zone warning effect, neither the zone turning effect nor the pre-reading zone effect may be executed.

  In step S1305-5, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the icon that is already displayed at this time is the prefetch zone effect notification mode or the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode. When the new hold icon is displayed when the pre-read zone effect suggestion mode is displayed and the zone precursor effect is being executed, the new hold icon is displayed as the pre-read zone effect notification mode or This is because the pre-read zone effect suggestion is displayed. By displaying the new hold icon in the same display mode as the pre-read zone effect notification mode or the pre-read zone effect suggestion mode that has already been displayed, the player can be sure to recognize the notification or suggestion of execution of the pre-read zone effect. be able to. Whether or not the display mode of the icon that is already displayed at this time is the pre-read zone effect notification mode or the pre-read zone effect suggestion mode is indicated by the predictive effect scenario data stored in the sub-RAM 102c. Can be determined based on

  If the sub CPU 102a determines in step S1305-5 that the display mode of the icon that is already displayed at this time is displayed in the prefetch zone effect notification mode or the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode, the process moves to step S1305-6. If it is determined that the display mode of the icon already displayed at this time is not the prefetch zone effect notification mode or the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode, the process proceeds to step S1305-7.

  In step S1305-6, the sub CPU 102a sets the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the start port winning designation command related to the start port winning time process to the same type as the display mode of the icons already displayed at the present time. A zone precursor effect icon effect control command indicating that the pre-read zone effect notification mode, the pre-read zone effect suggestion mode 1 or the pre-read zone effect suggestion mode 2 is set is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  The icon effect control command for zone precursor effect set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. When the image control board 105 receives the zone sign effect icon effect control command, the display mode of the icons that are already displayed at the present time with the hold icon corresponding to the start port winning designation command related to the start port winning time process. By displaying in the same type of display mode (pre-read zone effect notification mode, pre-read zone effect suggestion mode 1 or pre-read zone effect suggestion mode 2) as the (pre-read zone effect notification mode or pre-read zone effect suggestion mode), the zone precursor effect is displayed. Do.

  Note that the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the start opening prize designation command that triggers the execution of the zone precursor effect ends, and the zone effect target icon (change) displayed in the pre-read zone effect notification mode or the pre-read zone effect suggestion mode When the middle icon) is erased, the display mode of the zone effect non-target icon displayed in the prefetch zone effect notification mode or the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode becomes the normal mode.

  In step S1305-10, the sub CPU 102a changes the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the start port winning designation command related to the processing at the start port winning process to the normal mode and basically does not change to the special mode thereafter. Normal icon display mode scenario data indicating the normal icon display mode scenario is stored in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c. The normal icon display mode scenario data is stored in the icon display mode scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the start opening winning designation command in step S1305-1.

  Here, “basically” means that, as described above, when the zone precursor effect is executed when the icon is displayed in the normal mode, This is because the mode changes to a prefetch zone effect execution suggesting mode or a prefetch zone effect execution notifying mode.

  In addition, for the same start opening winning designation command, in other words, in the same starting opening winning process, an icon effect control command indicating a normal icon display mode scenario described later is set (step S1305-22). When an icon effect control command for zone sign effect is set (step S1305-6), it is assumed that the icon display control command is transmitted to the image control board 105 and the lamp control board 104 first. Therefore, in this case, after the hold icon of the normal mode is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon immediately changes to the prefetch zone effect execution suggestion mode or the prefetch zone effect execution notification mode.

  In step S1305-7, the sub CPU 102a, based on the pre-read zone effect scenario data and the precursor effect scenario data stored in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c, produces a pre-read zone effect, a zone turn effect, or a zone precursor effect. (Hereinafter referred to as “prefetch zone effect etc.”) is not executed at this time, but it is determined whether or not it is already scheduled to be executed. The determination is made in order to prevent the pre-read zone effect and the like from being executed redundantly.

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that the prefetch zone effect or the like is scheduled to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1305-10. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the prefetch zone effect or the like is not scheduled to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1305-8. Move.

  In step S1305-8, the sub CPU 102a determines that the determination result of the jackpot determination related to the changing effect currently being executed is based on the changing effect data stored in the changing effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c described later. It is determined whether or not. The variation effect data is identification information indicating the effect contents of the variation effect, but the variation effect data includes a jackpot determination result that triggers the execution of the variation effect. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is “big hit”, it moves the process to step S1305-10, and if it determines that it is not “big hit”, it moves the process to step S1305-9.

  In step S1305-9, the sub CPU 102a receives a start opening prize designation command related to the start opening prize designation process among the starting opening prize designation commands currently stored in the first presentation information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c. It is determined whether or not all of the preliminary determination results related to the first special figure hold (hereinafter referred to as “preceding hold”) corresponding to the start opening winning designation command stored previously are “reach without reach”. If the sub CPU 102a determines that all are “no reach loss”, the process proceeds to step S1305-11. If the sub CPU 102a determines that all are not “reach without reach”, the process proceeds to step S1305-10.

  In step S1305-11, the sub CPU 102a acquires a prefetch zone effect scenario determination random number indicated by a prefetch zone effect scenario determination random number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1305-12, the sub CPU 102a selects a prefetch zone effect determination table for performing prefetch zone effect scenario determination, and the prefetch zone effect scenario determination random number acquired in step S1305-11 in the selected determination table. The pre-read zone effect scenario determination for determining the pre-read zone effect scenario is performed.

  The pre-read zone effect scenario means the contents of the effect of the zone turn effect and the pre-read zone effect. The production contents of the zone production effect and the look-ahead zone production include whether or not the production effect is executed, the timing when the production production is executed, the type of the production production executed, the execution of the pre-read zone production Whether or not the prefetch zone effect is executed when the prefetch zone is executed is included.

  The pre-read zone effect scenario determination table is associated with the pre-determination result and the current first special figure hold number (U1) indicated by the start port winning designation command that is the target of the start port winning process (see FIG. 55). . Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the pre-read zone effect determination table, the pre-determination result indicated by the start opening winning designation command that is the target of the start opening winning process stored in the sub RAM 102c and the sub RAM 102c The number of first start opening winning designation commands stored in the 1 effect information hold storage area is referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 55, each pre-read zone effect scenario determination table associated with the pre-determination result and the first special figure hold number (U1) has a pre-read zone effect so that the selection rate (%) for each scenario is obtained. The scenario determination value and the prefetch zone effect scenario are stored in association with each other.

  “Present change”, “Before 1 change”, “Before 2 change” and “Before 3 change” described in the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table of FIG. Or the timing at which the roll failure production 2 is executed is shown. Here, “the change” represents a change display (hereinafter referred to as “the change”) of a special symbol corresponding to the start opening prize designation command related to the start opening prize process, and “1 change before” The change display of the special symbol one change before the change is displayed, “2 change before” indicates the change display of the special pattern two changes before the change, and “3 change before” indicates the change. It shows the change display of the special symbol three times before.

  In step S1305-12, when the sub CPU 102a performs the prefetch zone effect scenario determination, the sub CPU 102a stores prefetch zone effect scenario data indicating the prefetch zone effect scenario as the determination result in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c. . The storage of the pre-read zone effect scenario data is performed in the pre-read zone effect scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the start opening winning designation command in step S1305-1.

  In step S 1305-13, the sub CPU 102 a is a pre-read zone effect scenario in which the result of the pre-read zone effect scenario determination in step S 1305-12 is not limited to whether or not the pre-read zone effect is executed, but also includes the execution of the zone turning effect. In other words, it is determined whether or not to execute the zone turning effect based on the start opening winning designation command related to the start opening winning time processing. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the zone turning effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1305-14, and if the sub CPU 102a determines that the zone turning effect is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1305-4.

  In step S1305-14, the sub CPU 102a determines the final number of people related to the zone sign effect icon (hereinafter simply referred to as “final number”), and the final number determination random number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c. The random number for determining the final number of people indicated by is acquired.

  In step S1305-15, the sub CPU 102a selects a final number determination table for determining the final number, and compares the selected number with the final number determination random number obtained in step S1305-14. The final number of people is determined.

  The final number of people is the number of people who make up the icon used for the zone sign production, and means the number of people who finally reach. The “final” is because the direction of the zone warning effect, in other words, the number of people making up the icon used for the zone warning effect (the display mode of the icon) can change midway. is there. In this embodiment, the final number of people is set to four types of 1, 3, 5, and 7. This “one” corresponds to the second special mode, and “three” is the first. Corresponding to 3 special modes 1, “5” corresponds to the 3rd special mode 2, and “7” corresponds to the 3rd special mode 3. In other words, determining the final number of people can also mean determining the final icon display mode for the zone sign effect.

  The final number determination table is associated with the prefetch zone effect scenario determined in the prefetch zone effect scenario determination (see FIG. 56). In each final number determination table associated with the pre-read zone effect scenario, the final number determination value and the final number are stored in association with each other so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 56 is obtained. Therefore, when selecting the final number determination table, the sub CPU 102a refers to the prefetch zone effect scenario indicated by the prefetch zone effect scenario data stored in the sub RAM 102c.

  Further, “prediction effect scenario determination TBL.No” described in the final number determination table of FIG. 56 is identification information of a predictor effect scenario determination table used in zone predictor effect scenario determination described later, and is a start opening prize. The determination result of the prefetch zone effect scenario determination in the time process and the determination result of the final number determination are associated with each other. Therefore, the final number determination determines the final number of people, and also determines the precursor effect scenario determination table used in the zone precursor effect scenario determination.

  In step S1305-16, the sub CPU 102a acquires a zone precursor effect scenario determination random number indicated by a zone precursor effect scenario determination random number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c in order to determine a zone precursor effect scenario.

  The zone sign production scenario means the production contents of the zone sign production. In the contents of the zone warning effect, whether or not the zone warning effect can be executed and the icon display mode when the zone warning effect is executed is either the second special mode or the third special mode 1 to the third special mode 3. The change timing and the icon display mode after the change when changing (the number of persons constituting the icon) are included.

  In step S1305-17, the sub CPU 102a selects a zone precursor effect scenario determination table for performing zone precursor effect scenario determination, and for the zone precursor effect scenario determination acquired in step S1305-16 in the selected determination table. A zone precursor effect scenario determination is performed in which a zone precursor effect scenario is determined by collating random numbers.

  As described above, the zone sign effect scenario determination table includes the sign effect scenario determination TBL.1 in which the determination result of the pre-read zone effect scenario determination and the determination result of the final number determination in the start-up winning prize process are associated with each other. Associated with No. Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the zone sign effect scenario determination table, the sign effect scenario determination TBL. Derived as the determination result of the final number determination in step S1305-15. Refer to No.

  FIG. 57 is an example of a precursor effect scenario determination table. The “when winning”, “before 3 changes → before 2 changes”, and “before 2 changes → before 1 change” described in the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table are timings corresponding to the number of persons constituting the icon related to the zone sign effect. Represents. Here, “at the time of winning” represents the time when a special figure hold corresponding to the start opening winning designation command related to the start opening winning time process occurs, and “before 3 changes → before 2 changes”, the change is performed. This represents the period from when the change display of the 3rd special symbol ends to when the change display of the 2nd special symbol starts (when the hold icon is shifted). This represents a period from when the change display of the second special symbol in which the change is made ends to when the change display of the previous special symbol is started (when the hold icon is shifted).

  In FIG. 57, “when winning”, “before 3 changes → before 2 changes”, and “before 2 changes → before 1 change” are provided as the timing of the number of people constituting the icon related to the zone sign effect. In this embodiment, the timing at which the number of persons constituting the icon related to the zone sign effect changes is “at the time of winning”, “before 4 changes → before 3 changes” and “before 3 changes → before 2 changes”. And “2 before change → 1 before change”, and the sign effect scenario determination table used when the sign effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 57 is the first special figure hold number “3”. This is because only “at the time of winning”, “before 3 changes → before 2 changes”, and “before 2 changes → before 1 change” can occur.

  In the sign effect scenario determination table used in the case of the first special figure hold number “4”, the timing of changing the number of persons constituting the icon related to the zone sign effect is “at the time of winning”, “before 4 changes → 3 In the precursor effect scenario determination table used when “before change”, “before 3 change → before 2 change”, and “before 2 change → 1 change before” is set, and the first special figure holding number is “2”, As the timing at which the number of icons constituting the effect changes, “at the time of winning” and “before 2 changes → 1 before change” are set, and the sign effect scenario determination used when the first special figure hold number is “1” In the table, “at the time of winning” is set as the timing at which the number of persons constituting the icon related to the zone sign effect changes.

  Also, in FIG. 57, the numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” described below the column of the timing at which the number of people constituting the icon related to the zone precursor effect changes are as follows: It shows that the icon changes to a display mode composed of the number of persons.

  Therefore, for example, in the indication effect scenario 17-1, the display mode of the hold icon generated at the time of winning a prize and the display mode of the icon displayed at that time is a display mode (second special mode) consisting of the number of people “1”, and “3 In “before change → before 2 change”, the display mode of the icon displayed at that time is the display mode (third special mode 1) consisting of the number of people “3”, and in “before 2 change → before 1 change” The display content of the zone sign effect which becomes the display mode (third special mode 2) in which the display mode of the icon displayed at that time is the number of persons “5” is shown.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the zone sign effect scenario in step S1305-17, the sub CPU 102a stores the zone sign effect scenario data indicating the zone sign effect scenario as the determination result in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c. . The storage of the zone sign effect scenario data is performed in the zone sign effect scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the start opening winning designation command in step S1305-1.

  In step S1305-18, the sub CPU 102a executes the pre-read zone effect scenario that is the determination result of the pre-read zone effect scenario determination in step S1305-12 and the zone predictor effect scenario that is the determination result of the zone predictor effect scenario determination in step S1305-17. A pre-read zone effect control command indicating the effect content is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c.

  The prefetch zone effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the pre-read zone effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 according to the zone precursor effect scenario and the effect content indicated by the pre-read zone effect scenario indicated by the pre-read zone effect control command. Controls production and prefetch zone production.

  In step S1305-19, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the result of the prefetch zone effect scenario determination in step S1305-12 is a prefetch zone effect scenario including the execution of the prefetch zone effect, in other words, the start port. It is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read zone effect based on the start opening winning designation command related to the winning process. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the pre-read zone effect is to be executed, the process moves to step S1305-20, and the pre-read zone effect is not executed, but the zone-reading effect is executed (hereinafter, the pre-read zone effect is not executed, but the zone-reading effect is executed). If it is determined that execution is referred to as “gase zone production effect”, the process proceeds to step S1305-21.

  In step S1305-20, the sub CPU 102a selects a pre-read zone effect execution icon display mode scenario determination table for determining an icon display mode scenario when executing the pre-read zone effect, and the selected determination table includes: The icon display mode scenario determination for determining the icon display mode scenario is performed by checking the icon display mode scenario determination random number acquired in step S1305-2.

  The icon display mode scenario determination table for execution of the pre-read zone effect is provided for each precursor effect scenario in which the determination result of the pre-read zone effect scenario determination and the determination result of the final number determination in the start-up winning prize process are associated with each other. (See FIG. 58). Therefore, the sub CPU 102a refers to the sign effect scenario indicated by the sign effect scenario data stored in the sub RAM 102c when selecting the icon display mode scenario determination table for executing the prefetch zone effect.

  Each icon display mode scenario determination table provided for each precursor effect scenario has a plurality of icon display mode scenarios, and an icon display mode scenario determination value is appropriately assigned to each icon display mode scenario. ing.

  The pre-read zone effect execution icon display mode scenario determination table shown in FIG. 58 is “at the time of winning”, “2 before change”, “1 before change”, and “the change” are the timings at which the icon display mode changes. Represents. As described above, when the prefetch zone effect is being executed, the display mode of the displayed zone effect target icon is the third special mode 3, and the display mode of the zone effect non-target icon is the third special mode 6. . Further, even if the pre-read zone effect is not executed, the zone effect target icon becomes the second special mode or the third special mode 1 or 2 as the zone sign effect before the pre-read zone effect is executed. The non-target icon becomes the second special mode or the third special mode 4, 5. And when the icon of the 2nd special mode or the 3rd special mode containing a person's silhouette is displayed in this way, the silhouette of the person who constitutes the icon (the main silhouette part for the 3rd special mode) The color can change.

  For example, “white → green” of “2 before change” in the icon display mode scenario “5” in FIG. 58 is the silhouette of the person who constitutes the icon displayed in white (the main silhouette portion for the third special mode). Indicates that the color changes to green.

  Similarly, “white → green → red → zebra → rainbow” of “the change” of the icon display mode scenario “15” in FIG. 58 is the silhouette of the person who makes up the icon displayed in white (third As for the special mode, the color of the main silhouette portion) changes stepwise from green → red → zebra pattern → rainbow color.

  In addition, the change of the color of the person's silhouette (the main silhouette portion for the third special mode) constituting the icon is appropriately performed according to the contents of the effect of the changing effect being performed at that time. The production contents of the fluctuating production for changing the color of the person's silhouette include one or more steps during the fluctuating production according to the pseudo stop or re-variation of the pseudo-ream and the expectation of winning the jackpot When stepping up a so-called step-up notice to step up an effect (effect image, effect sound, etc.), a predetermined cut-in notice for displaying a cut-in image corresponding to the degree of expectation of winning a big hit on the image display device 14 When displaying a speech image corresponding to the degree of expectation on the image display device 14 while executing speech advance notice that causes speech speech to be output from the sound output device 15, appearance of a character, or development effect that develops into super reach, when a reach state is established A predetermined operation effect by the effect accessory device 17 is appropriately set according to the changing effect at that time. Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the color of the person's silhouette (the main silhouette portion for the third special mode) constituting the icon related to the icon display mode scenario for executing the prefetch zone effect changes is the present embodiment. The present invention is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate, for example, when the icon shifts when the predetermined variation effect ends and the next variation effect starts.

  When the sub CPU 102a performs the icon display mode scenario determination in step S1305-20, the sub CPU 102a stores icon display mode scenario data indicating the icon display mode scenario indicating the determination result in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c. . The icon display mode scenario data is stored in the icon display mode scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the start opening winning designation command in step S1305-1.

  In step S1305-21, the sub CPU 102a shows the same normal icon display mode scenario as that in step S1305-10 as the icon display mode scenario of the icon corresponding to the start opening winning designation command that triggers execution of the gusset zone turning effect. The normal icon display mode scenario data is stored in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c. In the present embodiment, the icon display mode scenario of the icon corresponding to the start opening prize designation command that triggers execution of the gaze zone turning effect is a normal mode, but the starting opening prize that triggers execution of the gaze zone turning effect is provided. For the icon display mode scenario of the icon corresponding to the specified command, a determination table similar to the icon display mode scenario determination table for executing the prefetch zone effect is provided, and the prefetch zone effect of step S1305-20 is based on the table. The determination can also be performed in the same manner as the icon display mode scenario determination.

  Here, “basically” means that, as described above, when the zone precursor effect is executed when the icon is displayed in the normal mode, This is because the mode changes to a prefetch zone effect execution suggesting mode or a prefetch zone effect execution notifying mode. The normal icon display mode scenario data is stored in the icon display mode scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the start opening winning designation command in step S1305-1.

  In step S1305-22, the sub CPU 102a sets, in the transmission buffer, the icon display control command indicated by the icon display mode scenario set in the icon display mode scenario area of the sub RAM 102c in the main start port winning time process. End time processing.

  The icon display control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the icon display control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 display icons in accordance with the icon display mode scenario indicated by the icon display control command.

  In step S1305-4, the sub CPU 102a performs icon display mode scenario determination processing (icon display mode scenario determination processing for non-turning effect execution) in the case of not executing the zone turning effect. The icon display mode scenario determination processing for non-exercising production effects will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1305-4-1, the sub CPU 102a presents an icon change notice prohibition period that is currently a period during which the icon change notice that makes the icon display form a special form is prohibited, specifically, during a jackpot game, SPSP During reach production, such as during reach or SP reach, for a period of time until a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of special symbol change display, for a predetermined time before the special symbol is stopped (for example, 10 seconds) or whether or not an effect of changing the icon display mode has already been executed or is scheduled to be executed. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is the icon change notice period, it moves the process to step S1305-4-15, and if it determines that it is not the icon change notice period, it moves the process to step S1305-4-2.

  In step S1305-4-15, the sub CPU 102a stores the same normal icon display mode scenario data as the normal icon display mode scenario data stored in step S1305-10 in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c. The normal icon display mode scenario data is stored in the icon display mode scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the start opening winning designation command in step S1305-1.

  In step S1305-4-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not an effect mode A that is a normal effect mode is currently set. This is because in this embodiment, a handshake event notice described later is performed only in the effect mode A. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode A is set, it moves the process to step S1305-4-3, and if it determines that the effect mode A is not set, it moves the process to step S1305-4-12.

  In step S <b> 1305-4-3, the sub CPU 102 a determines whether or not all of the prior determination results related to the advance hold are “reach without reach”. If the sub CPU 102a determines that all are “no reach loss”, the process proceeds to step S1305-4-4. If the sub CPU 102a determines that all are not “reach without reach”, the process proceeds to step S1305-4-12.

  In step S1305-4-4, the sub CPU 102a indicates a handshake meeting notice execution random number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c to perform the handshake meeting notice determination to determine whether or not to execute the handshake meeting notice. Get random number for handshake meeting notice execution judgment.

  The handshake event notice is a kind of notice effect that suggests that there is a possibility of winning the jackpot and / or the expectation degree of the jackpot winning, and is performed using the changing icon. In the handshake meeting notice, the changing icon that is the subject of the notice is displayed in the fourth special aspect 1, and the person who constitutes the changing icon of the fourth special aspect 1 (hereinafter referred to as “shake meeting hero”), Along with the execution of the handshake meeting notice, a predetermined handshake character appearing near the changing icon display area 142 shakes hands. When the handshake party protagonist and the handshake character are shaking hands, the color of the handshake party protagonist gradually changes when a predetermined line appears from the handshake character on the display unit 140. If the color of the hero of the handshake party gradually changes, then the color of the hero of the handshake party changes completely and the color change succeeds, and the color changes back to the original color in the middle of the color change. Sometimes the color change fails.

  The number of times a line appears in one handshake meeting notice (hereinafter referred to as “the number of lines”) is set in plural. In the present embodiment, the number of lines is set to four types of 1 to 4.

  In addition, a handshake meeting notice suggestion effect is provided in relation to the handshake meeting notice. The handshake meeting notice suggestion effect is an effect suggesting that the handshake meeting notice is executed. For the handshake event notice suggestion, the hold icon for the handshake event notice is displayed in the 4th special for the execution of the handshake event notice until the start of the handshake event notice. In addition to displaying in the mode 2, the handshake meeting notice non-target changing icon is displayed in the fourth special form 3, and the handshake meeting notice non-target hold icon is displayed in the fourth special form 4.

  In step S1305-4-5, the sub CPU 102a selects a handshake meeting notice execution determination table for determining handshake meeting notice execution, and the handshake meeting notice execution determination acquired in step S1305-4-4 in the selected table. A handshake meeting notice execution determination is performed to determine whether or not the handshake meeting can be executed by comparing the random numbers for use.

  The handshake meeting notice execution determination table is associated with the pre-determination result of the start opening winning designation command that is the target of the start opening winning process (see FIG. 59). Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the handshake meeting notice execution determination table, the preliminary determination result indicated by the start opening winning designation command that is the target of the start opening winning process stored in the sub RAM 102c and the sub RAM 102c. The number of first start opening winning designation commands stored in the first effect information hold storage area is referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 59, in each handshake meeting notice execution determination table associated with the pre-determination result, the handshake meeting notice execution is performed to determine whether or not the handshake meeting notice is executed so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 59 is obtained. Determination values are stored in association with each other.

  In step S1305-4-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the determination result of the handshake meeting notice execution determination in step S1305-4-5 is “execute handshake meeting notice”. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the handshake meeting notice is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1305-4-7, and if the sub CPU 102a determines that the handshake meeting notice is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1305-4-12.

  In step S1305-4-7, the sub CPU 102a determines the final display mode of the icon when the handshake meeting notice is executed, specifically, the final color of the main character of the handshake meeting notice hero constituting the changing icon for the handshake meeting notice object. In order to perform the final icon display mode determination to be performed, a random number for determining the final icon display mode for the handshake event indicated by the random number counter for determining the final display mode icon for the handshake event provided in the sub RAM 102c is acquired.

  In step S1305-4-8, the sub CPU 102a selects an icon final display mode determination table for handshake meeting announcement for determining the final display mode for handshake meeting notification, and the selected table is displayed in step S1305. The icon final display mode determination for handshake meeting notice is performed to determine the icon final display form for handshake meeting notice by collating the random number for icon final display form determination acquired in 4-7.

  The icon final display mode determination table for handshake meeting advance notice is associated with the prior determination result of the start port winning designation command that is the target of the start port winning process and the current first special figure hold number (U1) ( (See FIG. 60). Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the icon final display mode determination table for handshake meeting advance notice, the pre-determination indicated by the start opening prize designation command which is the target of the start opening prize process stored in the sub RAM 102c. The result and the number of first start opening winning designation commands stored in the first effect information holding storage area of the sub RAM 102c are referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the icon final display mode determination table for handshake meeting advance notice associated with the preliminary determination result and the first special figure hold number (U1) includes a plurality of icon final display modes, The icon final display mode determination value is stored in association with each icon final display mode so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 60 is obtained.

  Further, the “final color pattern” described in the icon final display mode determination table for handshake meeting notice in FIG. 60 is used when selecting a line number determination table used in line number determination described later, It is identification information in which the prior determination result, the first special figure reservation number, and the icon final display mode indicated by the start opening winning designation command related to the mouth winning winning process are associated. Therefore, the final icon display mode is determined in the final icon display determination for the handshake meeting notice, and the dialog count determination table used in the dialog count determination is determined.

  In step S1305-4-9, the sub CPU 102a determines the number of dialogues to determine the number of dialogues that appear in the handshake meeting notice, and the number of dialogues indicated by the dialogue number judgment random number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c. Get random number for judgment.

  In step S1305-4-10, the sub CPU 102a selects a speech count determination table for determining the speech count, and collates the random number for speech count determination acquired in step S1305-4-9 with the selected table. Thus, the number of lines is determined to determine the number of lines for the handshake meeting notice.

  The line number determination table is a table for determining the number of lines, and corresponds to the preliminary determination result of the start opening prize designation command, the first special figure reservation number, and the icon final display mode, which is the target of the start opening winning process. It is associated with the assigned final color pattern (see FIG. 61). Therefore, when selecting the dialogue count determination table, the sub CPU 102a refers to the final color pattern derived as the determination result of the final display mode determination for the handshake event notice in step S1305-4-8.

  Each line number determination table associated with the final color pattern has a line number, and the line number determination value appropriately corresponds to each line number so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 61 is obtained. Attached and stored.

  Further, “Icon display mode scenario determination TBL.No for handshake meeting notice” described in the line number determination table of FIG. 61 is for the handshake meeting notice used in the icon display form scenario determination for handshake meeting notice described later. This is the identification information of the icon display mode scenario determination table, and the final color pattern and the number of lines related to the line number determination are associated with each other. Accordingly, the number of dialogues is determined by the number of dialogues determination, and the icon display mode scenario determination table for the handshake meeting advance notice used for the handshake meeting advance notice scenario determination is determined.

  In step S1305-4-11, the sub CPU 102a selects an icon display mode scenario determination table for handshake event notification for determining an icon display mode scenario when executing a handshake event notification, and the selected determination table Then, the icon display mode scenario determination for determining the icon display mode scenario for handshake meeting notice is performed by collating the random number for icon display mode scenario determination acquired in step S1305-2.

  The icon display mode scenario determination table for handshake event notice is a table for determining the icon display mode scenario when the handshake event notice is executed, and for the handshake event notice corresponding to the final color pattern and the number of lines. Icon display mode scenario determination TBL. No. (see FIGS. 62 and 63). Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the icon display mode scenario determination table for handshake meeting notice, the icon display form scenario for handshake meeting notice derived as the determination result of the speech count determination in step S1305-4-10. Determination TBL. Refer to No.

  As shown in FIG. 62 and FIG. 63, icon display mode scenario determination TBL. In the icon display mode scenario determination table for each handshake meeting notice associated with No, an icon display form scenario for handshake meeting notice is provided, and each handshake meeting notice is set so as to have a preset selection rate. An icon display mode scenario determination value is stored in association with an appropriate icon display mode scenario. In the present embodiment, the number of icon display mode scenarios provided for each handshake meeting notice icon display mode scenario determination table varies, and in each icon handshake meeting notice icon display mode scenario determination table, The icon display mode scenario determination value is appropriately associated with each icon display mode scenario for the handshake meeting notice so that the selection rate of each icon display mode scenario provided in the icon display mode scenario determination table is uniform. Suppose that

  FIG. 63 is an example of an icon display mode scenario determination table for handshake meeting advance notice. Icon display mode for handshake meeting advance notice “At the time of winning”, “1 change before → change” and “the (line) 1st”, “the (line) 2nd” “the ( “The dialogue” 3rd ”and“ the (the dialogue) 4th ”represent the timing when the icon display mode changes due to the handshake meeting notice.

  As described above, the number of dialogues that can appear from a given character in one handshake meeting notice is 1 to 4 times, and “the (part) first time” indicates the appearance of the first dialogue in the handshake meeting notice. “The second line” represents the appearance of the second line in the handshake meeting notice, “The third line” represents the third line appearance in the handshake meeting notice, "(Line) 4th" represents the appearance of the 4th line in the handshake meeting notice.

  “White” for “winning” described in FIG. 63 indicates that when the handshake event notice target hold icon is displayed at the time of winning, it is suddenly displayed in the fourth special mode 21 of white. . On the other hand, “white” for “before 1 change → the change” indicates that the handshake meeting notice target hold icon displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning a prize is shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the handshake meeting notice target is changing. When it becomes an icon, it shows that the said handshake meeting notice object changing icon is displayed with the 4th special aspect 11 of white.

  In addition, “˜successful success” described in FIG. 63 indicates that the change to the color corresponding to “˜” of “˜successful success” is successful, and “˜successful failure” refers to “ Change to a color that falls under "~" in "Successful success" fails, specifically, it tries to change to a color that matches "~", but returns to the color before the change in the middle of the change . In the present embodiment, the color change is performed from the lower end to the upper end of the handshake meeting notice hero.

  For example, in the icon display mode scenario “120” for handshake meeting notice, the handshake meeting notice target hold icon of the fourth special form 21 (the person part is white) is displayed at the time of winning, and the handshake meeting notice target hold icon is When the icon is shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and becomes the changing icon for the handshake meeting notice object, it becomes the changing icon for the handshake meeting notice object of the fourth special mode 11 (the main character of the handshake meeting is white). After the appearance of the first dialogue, the handshake meeting hero's color changes to green after the handshake meeting hero's color of the changing icon for the handshake meeting notice subject changes to green. With the appearance of the second dialogue, after the inciting effect of whether or not the handshake party hero's color changes to red, the handshake party hero's color changes to red and the third dialogue appears. The handshake party owner After the reverberation of whether or not the color of the handshake changes to a zebra pattern, the color of the hero of the handshake party changes to the zebra pattern, and when the fourth line appears, the color of the hero of the handshake party changes to rainbow This represents the content of the effect in which the color of the protagonist of the handshake meeting changes to a rainbow after the effect of whether or not it changes.

  In addition, in the icon display mode scenario “122” for handshake meeting notice, the handshake meeting notice target hold icon of the fourth special form 21 (the person part is white) is displayed at the time of winning, and the handshake meeting notice target hold icon is When the icon is shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and becomes the changing icon for the handshake meeting notice object, the icon is the changing icon for the handshake meeting notice object of the fourth special mode 12 (the main character of the handshake meeting is green). After the appearance of the first dialogue, after the rendition of whether or not the handshake party hero's color changes to red, the handshake party hero's color changes to red and the second dialogue appears. In addition, after the reverberation of whether or not the color of the hero of the handshake party changes to the zebra pattern, the color of the hero of the handshake party returns to red without changing to the zebra pattern, and the appearance of the third dialogue , The color of the hero of the handshake meeting Whether the color of the handshake party hero changes to iridescent when the 4th line appears, after returning to red without changing to the zebra pattern after the indomitable effect of whether to change to the bra pattern This represents the contents of the production in which the color of the protagonist of the handshake meeting changes to a rainbow color after such a production is performed.

  When the sub CPU 102a performs the handshake meeting notice icon display mode scenario determination in step S1305-4-11, the handshake meeting notice icon display form scenario indicating the handshake meeting notice icon display form scenario indicating the determination result is obtained. The data is stored in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c. The handshake meeting notice icon display mode scenario data is stored in the icon display mode scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the start opening winning designation command in step S1305-1.

  In step S1305-4-12, the sub CPU 102a changes the final icon display mode (hereinafter referred to as “normal icon final display mode”) when the pre-read zone effect or the like is not executed and the handshake meeting notice is not executed. In order to perform the normal icon final display mode determination to be determined, the normal icon final display mode determination random number indicated by the normal icon final display mode determination random number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c is acquired.

  In step S1305-4-13, the sub CPU 102a selects a normal icon final display mode determination table for determining a normal icon final display mode, and adds the selected table to the selected table in step S1305-4-12. The normal icon final display mode determination for determining the normal icon final display mode is performed by collating the acquired normal icon final display mode determination random numbers.

  The normal icon final display mode determination table is associated with the preliminary determination result of the start port winning designation command that is the target of the start port winning process and the current first special figure hold number (U1) (FIG. 64). reference). Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the normal icon final display mode determination table, the preliminary determination result indicated by the start opening winning designation command that is the target of the start opening winning process stored in the sub RAM 102c and The number of first start opening winning designation commands stored in the first effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c is referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the normal icon final display mode determination table associated with the prior determination result and the first special figure hold number (U1) is provided with a plurality of icon final display modes. The icon final display mode determination value is stored in association with each icon final display mode so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG.

  Further, “normal icon display mode scenario determination TBL.No” described in the normal icon final display mode determination table of FIG. 64 is used when selecting a normal icon display mode scenario determination table to be described later. Used for. Therefore, the final icon display mode is determined in the normal icon final display mode determination, and the normal icon display mode scenario determination table is determined.

  In step S1305-4-14, the sub CPU 102a selects a normal icon display mode scenario determination table for performing an icon display mode scenario determination when no pre-read zone effect or the like is executed and no handshake meeting notice is executed. Then, the normal icon display mode scenario determination for determining the normal icon display mode scenario is performed by comparing the selected table with the icon display mode scenario determination random number acquired in step S1305-2.

  The normal icon display mode scenario determination table is a table for determining an icon display mode scenario in a case where the pre-read zone effect or the like is not executed and the handshake meeting notice is not executed, and the book stored in the sub RAM 102c. The pre-determination result indicated by the start opening prize designation command that is the target of the start opening prize process, the number of first start opening prize designation commands stored in the first effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and the normal use Normal icon display mode scenario determination TBL. No. (see FIGS. 64 and 65). Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the normal icon display mode scenario determination table, the normal icon display mode derived as the determination result of the normal icon final display mode determination in step S1305-4-13. Determination scenario determination TBL. Refer to No.

  As shown in FIG. 65, a normal icon display mode scenario determination TBL. Each normal icon display mode scenario determination table associated with No includes normal icon display mode scenarios, and each normal icon display mode scenario has a preset selection rate. In addition, icon display mode scenario determination values are stored in association with each other as appropriate. In the present embodiment, the number of icon display mode scenarios provided in each normal icon display mode scenario determination table varies, and in each normal icon display mode scenario determination table, the icon display mode scenario concerned. Assume that an icon display mode scenario determination value is appropriately associated with each normal icon display mode scenario so that the selection rate of each icon display mode scenario provided in the determination table is uniform.

  FIG. 65 is an example of a normal icon display mode scenario determination table. The “when winning”, “before 2 changes → 1 change before”, “1 change before”, “before 1 change → the change” and “the change” described in the normal icon display mode scenario determination table are: The timing at which the icon display mode changes is shown.

  “Throwing kiss notice success” described in FIG. 65 indicates that a throwing kiss notice described later is performed and the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes. “Throwing kiss notice failure 1” indicates that a throwing kiss notice described later is performed, but the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon does not change. Further, “throwing kiss notice failure 2” indicates that a throwing kiss notice to be described later is about to be performed, but the throwing kiss notice is not executed.

  Also, the parentheses following “success kiss notice success” shown in FIG. 65 indicate the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon that changes depending on the throw kiss notice.

  For example, in the normal icon display mode scenario “70”, the hold icon of the second special mode is displayed at the time of winning a prize, and the special symbol of the previous one is displayed after the change display of the special symbol two times before the change ends. When the change display of is started, the display mode of the hold icon changes to the second special mode 11, and the display mode of the hold icon is the second special mode by the throwing kiss notice in the change display of the previous special symbol. When the change is started and the change is started after the change display of the previous special symbol is finished, the display state of the hold icon is changed to the second special form 13.

  Further, in the normal icon display mode scenario “73”, the normal mode hold icon is displayed at the time of winning a prize, and the display mode of the hold icon is displayed in the throwing kiss notice in the change display of the special symbol immediately before the change. 2 When trying to change to the special mode 11, the change ends in failure, remains in the normal mode, and when the change is started after the change display of the previous special symbol ends, The display mode is changed to the second special mode 12, and in the change, the display mode of the changing icon is changed to the second special mode 13 by the throwing kiss notice.

  When the sub CPU 102a performs the normal icon display mode scenario determination in step S1305-4-14, the normal CPU icon display mode scenario data indicating the normal icon display mode scenario indicating the determination result is stored in the sub RAM 102c. Store in the effect information hold storage area. The normal icon display mode scenario data is stored in the icon display mode scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the start opening winning designation command in step S1305-1.

  In the present embodiment, the first special mode is set as the display mode of the normal icon when neither the pre-reading zone effect nor the handshake meeting notice is performed. As the first special mode, one kind of blinking display mode in which the shape is circular and the color is white is set. However, in the same manner as the second special mode 11 to the second special mode 15, the color is changed. It is also possible to set a plurality of different first special modes. In this case, for example, the first special mode 11 is a blinking display mode in which the shape is circular and the color is white, the first special mode 12 is a display mode in which the shape is circular and the color is green, and the shape is circular and the color is red. The display mode is a first special mode 13, the display is a circle with a zebra pattern, the first special mode 14, and the display is a circle with a rainbow color. Then, in which first special mode the icon is displayed can be determined based on whether or not the preliminary determination result indicated by the start-up winning designation command related to the icon is a big hit. In this case, the jackpot winning expectation degree according to the first special mode 11 to the first special mode 15 is the same as the second special mode: first special mode 11 <first special mode 12 <first special mode 13 <first It can also be made higher in the order of special mode 14 <first special mode 15. When the icon display mode is changed from the first special mode 11 to the first special mode 15, the icon is displayed as a hold icon before it becomes a changing icon (so-called “look-ahead stage”) ( When the icon is displayed as the hold icon in the first hold icon display area 141), the first special mode 11 to the first special mode 15 can be easily changed.

◇ (Game control command analysis processing of the production control board)
The game state designation command analysis processing by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1305-2-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the MODE data and DATA data of the received gaming state designation command to analyze whether there is an abnormality such as a bit drop, and in step S1305-2-2, It is determined whether or not it is a normal gaming state designation command (whether or not the gaming state designation command is normally received), and if it is determined that it is a normal gaming state designation command, the process proceeds to step S1305-2-3. If it is determined that the command is not a normal game state designation command, the process proceeds to step S1305-2-5.

  In step S1305-2-3, the sub CPU 102a stores the gaming state corresponding to the received gaming state designation command in the gaming state storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1305-2-4, the gaming state abnormality flag of the sub RAM 102c. The gaming state abnormality flag in the storage area is turned OFF, and this gaming state designation command analysis process is terminated.

  In step S1305-2-5, the sub CPU 102a discards the received gaming state designation command, and in step S1305-2-6, turns on the gaming state abnormality flag in the gaming state abnormality flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. Terminates the status specification command analysis processing.

(Produce design designation command analysis processing of production control board)
The effect symbol designation command analysis process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1307-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the MODE data and DATA data of the received effect designating command to analyze whether there is an abnormality such as bit dropping, and in step S1307-2, the normal gaming state If it is determined whether it is a designation command (whether the effect designating command has been received normally) and it is determined that it is a normal gaming state designation command, the process proceeds to step S1307-3 to designate a normal gaming state. If it is determined that it is not a command, the process proceeds to step S1307-5.

  In step S1307-3, the sub CPU 102a stores the received effect symbol designation command in the effect information designation command area of the effect information storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1307-4, the effect symbol abnormality flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. Is turned off, and the effect symbol designating command analysis process is terminated.

  In step S1307-5, the sub CPU 102a discards the received effect symbol designation command, and in step S1307-6, turns on the effect symbol abnormality flag in the effect symbol abnormality flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and performs this effect symbol designation command analysis. The process ends.

(Special drawing variation pattern designation command analysis processing of production control board)
The special figure variation pattern designation command analysis processing by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1309-1-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the MODE data and DATA data of the received special figure variation pattern designation command to analyze whether there is an abnormality such as a bit drop, and in step S1309-1-2. In step S1309, it is determined whether the command is a normal special figure variation pattern designation command (whether the special figure variation pattern designation command is normally received). If the process is shifted to 1-3, and it is determined that the command is not a normal special figure variation pattern designation command, the process shifts to step S1309-1-5.

  In step S1309-1-3, the sub CPU 102a stores the received effect symbol designation command in the special information variation pattern designation command storage area of the effect information in the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1309-1-4, the sub RAM 102c. The special figure fluctuation pattern abnormality flag in the special figure fluctuation pattern abnormality flag storage area is turned OFF.

  In step S1309-1-5, the sub CPU 102a discards the received special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, and in step S1309-1-6, the special figure fluctuation pattern abnormality flag in the special figure fluctuation pattern abnormality flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. Turn on.

  In step S1309-1-7, the sub CPU 102a checks the gaming state abnormality flag, the production symbol abnormality flag, and the special figure fluctuation pattern abnormality flag stored in the sub RAM 102c. In step 1309-1-8, the sub CPU 102a performs the fluctuation production. A first execution condition determination table (see FIG. 66A) for determining whether or not the first execution condition for execution is satisfied (whether satisfied) is selected. In step S1309-1-9, the first execution condition determination table is selected. The first execution condition (first command abnormality) is determined by collating the one execution condition determination table with each abnormality flag confirmed in step S1309-1-7.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (a), the first execution condition determination table includes a gaming state abnormality flag ON / OFF, an effect symbol abnormality flag ON / OFF, a special figure variation pattern abnormality flag ON / OFF, and a determination result. Are necessary and sufficient to execute a variation effect corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol executed on the main control board 101 (to prevent the player from misidentifying the result of the variation display of the special symbol). It is used to determine whether information is available.

  Here, OFF in the gaming state abnormality flag column indicates that there is no abnormality in the gaming state designation command, and ON in the gaming state abnormality flag column indicates that there is an abnormality in the gaming state designation command. Further, OFF in the effect symbol abnormality flag column indicates that there is no abnormality in the effect symbol designation command, and ON in the effect symbol abnormality flag column indicates that there is an abnormality in the effect symbol designation command. In addition, OFF in the special figure fluctuation pattern abnormality flag column indicates that there is no abnormality in the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, and ON in the special figure fluctuation pattern abnormality flag field indicates that there is an abnormality in the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command. It shows that there was.

  Specifically, if there is no abnormality in the gaming state designation command, the effect symbol designation command, and the special figure variation pattern designation command, the result of the first execution condition determination is the first execution condition for executing the variation effect. It is determined that the condition is satisfied (the first command is not abnormal).

  In addition, when there is no abnormality in the game state designation command, but there is an abnormality in the production symbol designation command and / or the special figure variation pattern designation command, the result of the first execution condition determination is for executing the variation production. It is determined that the first execution condition is not satisfied (the first command is abnormal).

  If there is an abnormality in the game state designation command, but there is no abnormality in the effect symbol designation command and the special figure variation pattern designation command, the result of the first execution condition determination is the first for executing the variation effect. It is determined that the execution condition is satisfied (the first command is not abnormal).

  Further, when there is an abnormality in the gaming state designation command and there is an abnormality in the effect symbol designation command and / or the special figure variation pattern designation command, the result of the first execution condition determination is the first for executing the variation effect. It is determined that the execution condition is not satisfied (the first command is abnormal).

  In step S1309-1-10, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the result of the first execution condition determination satisfies the first execution condition, and determines that the first execution condition is satisfied (the first command is not abnormal). If the process proceeds to step S1309-1-11 and it is determined that the first execution condition is not satisfied (the first command is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S1309-1-16.

  In step S1309-11, the sub CPU 102a checks the effect symbol designation command and the special symbol variation pattern designation command stored in the effect symbol designation command storage area and the special symbol variation pattern designation command storage area of the sub RAM 102c, In step S1309-12, the second execution condition determination table (see FIG. 66 (b)) for determining whether or not the second execution condition for executing the variation effect is satisfied (satisfied) is selected. In step S1309-1-13, the second execution condition (second command abnormality) is determined by collating the second execution condition determination table with each command confirmed in step S1309-1-11.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (b), the second execution condition determination table is associated with the type of effect symbol designation command, the type of special figure variation pattern designation command, and the determination result, and is specified by the effect symbol designation command. The types of special symbols to be played (big hits 1 to 3, lost with reach, lost without reach) and the types of change display patterns of special symbols specified by the special figure change pattern designation command (big hit change, loss change) match It is used to determine whether or not

  Specifically, the special symbol type specified by the special symbol designation command is any one of jackpots 1-3, and the special symbol variation display pattern type identified by the special symbol variation pattern designation command is jackpot variation. In this case, it is determined that the result of the second execution condition determination satisfies the second execution condition for executing the variation effect (no second command abnormality).

  Also, when the special symbol type specified by the special symbol designation command is one of the jackpots 1 to 3, and the variation display pattern type of the special symbol identified by the special symbol variation pattern designation command is a loss variation As a result of the second execution condition determination, it is determined that the second execution condition for executing the variation effect is not satisfied (the second command is abnormal).

  In addition, when the special symbol type specified by the special symbol designation command is a loss with reach or without reach and the variation display pattern type of the special symbol specified by the special symbol variation pattern designation command is a loss variation. As a result of the second execution condition determination, it is determined that the second execution condition for executing the variation effect is satisfied (no second command abnormality).

  Also, if the special symbol type specified by the special symbol designation command is reach loss or non-reach loss, and the special symbol variation display pattern type specified by the special symbol variation pattern designation command is jackpot variation As a result of the second execution condition determination, it is determined that the second execution condition for executing the variation effect is not satisfied (the second command is abnormal).

  In step S1309-1-14, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the result of the second execution condition determination satisfies the second execution condition, and determines that the second execution condition is satisfied (no second command abnormality). If the process proceeds to step S1309-1-15 and it is determined that the second execution condition is not satisfied (the second command is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S1309-1-16.

  In step S1309-1-15, the sub CPU 102 a displays a change effect corresponding to the current special symbol change display (effect display change display), a pre-read zone effect (continuous notice effect), a changing icon change notice (handshake meeting notice) In order to allow the execution of the throwing kiss notice), the production restriction flag in the production restriction flag storage area of the sub-RAM 102c is turned off, and the special figure variation pattern designation command analysis processing is terminated.

  In step S1309-1-16, the sub CPU 102 a displays a change effect corresponding to the current special symbol change display (effect display change display), a pre-read zone effect (continuous notice effect), a changing icon change notice (shake event notice) In order to restrict (limit) the execution of the throwing kiss notice), the effect restriction flag in the effect restriction flag storage area of the sub-RAM 102c is turned on, and the special figure variation pattern designation command analysis processing is terminated.

  In this way, it is determined whether or not the gaming state designation command, the production symbol designation command, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 101 at the start of the variation display of the special symbol have been normally received (first execution). When the condition determination and the second execution condition determination) are successfully received (the first execution condition determination and the second execution condition determination are satisfied), the production restriction flag is turned off, but the reception is not normally performed. When the first execution condition determination and the second execution condition determination are not satisfied, the effect restriction flag is turned on.

  Therefore, when the production restriction flag is OFF, it is assumed that the game state designation command, the production symbol designation command, and the special figure variation pattern designation command have been normally received (no command abnormality) in steps S1309-3 to S1312. The process is executed, and during this special symbol variation display period, the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation display (effect symbol variation display), the look-ahead zone effect (continuous notice effect), and the changing icon change notice (shake event) Notice, throwing kiss notice) will be executed.

  On the other hand, when the production restriction flag is ON, it is determined that the game state designation command, the production symbol designation command, and the special figure variation pattern designation command have not been normally received (there is a command abnormality) in steps S1309-3 to S1312. Processing is not executed, and during this special symbol variation display period, the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation display (effect symbol variation display), the pre-read zone effect (continuous notice effect), and the changing icon change notice (shake handshake) Meeting notice, throwing kiss notice) will not be executed.

  Although the first execution condition determination and the second execution condition determination are performed to turn the production restriction flag ON / OFF, the production restriction flag is turned on according to the result of the first execution condition determination or the second execution condition determination. / OFF. Also, instead of performing the first execution condition determination and the second execution condition determination in the special figure variation pattern designation command analysis process, the first execution condition determination process and the second execution condition determination may be performed independently. The reception interval of the game state designation command, the production symbol designation command, and the special figure variation pattern designation command is determined, and when the command to be received for a predetermined time is not received, the first execution condition determination and the second execution are performed. Condition determination may be performed.

  Further, the gaming state abnormality flag, the effect symbol abnormality flag, and the special figure fluctuation pattern abnormality flag that are turned on may be turned off every time after the first execution condition determination and the second execution condition determination are completed.

(Determination design stop display pattern determination processing of the production control board)
The effect symbol stop display pattern determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1309-3-1, the sub CPU 102a checks the current effect mode by referring to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and is associated with the current effect mode. A production symbol stop display pattern determination table is selected. This is because the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table for determining the effect symbol stop display pattern representing the combination (placement) of the decorative symbols on the predetermined effective line in the effect symbol stop display is divided according to the effect mode. It is.

  In step S1309-3-2, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the effect symbol designation command stored in the effect symbol designation command area of the effect information in the sub RAM 102c. This is because each effect symbol stop display pattern determination table divided according to the effect mode is further divided according to the effect symbol designation command. In step S1309-3-3, an effect symbol stop display pattern determination table associated with the effect symbol designation command analyzed in step S1307-2 is selected. In step S1309-3-4, the sub CPU 102a obtains a random number value indicated by a random number counter related to the random number for determining the effect symbol stop display pattern.

  In each effect symbol stop display pattern determination table, one or more effect symbol stop display patterns are stored in association with the effect symbol stop display pattern determination value. For example, as shown in FIG. The effect symbol stop display pattern determination value is appropriately assigned to the effect symbol stop display pattern so as to obtain a preset selection rate.

  In step S1309-3-5, the sub CPU 102a adds the effect symbol stop display pattern determination random number acquired in step S1309-3-4 to the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table selected in step S1309-3-3. The effect symbol stop display pattern is determined by collating to determine the effect symbol stop display pattern, and the effect symbol stop display pattern is determined.

  In step S1309-3-6, the sub CPU 102a sets an effect symbol stop display control command corresponding to the effect symbol stop display pattern determined in step S1309-3-5 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and step S1309-3. At -7, the effect symbol stop display pattern data corresponding to the effect symbol stop display pattern is set in the effect symbol stop display pattern data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  The effect symbol stop display control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect symbol stop display control command, when the special symbol stop display is performed, the lamp control substrate 104 and the image control board 105 display the effect symbol stop display based on the effect symbol stop display pattern indicated by the command. It is executed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

  In step S1309-3-8, the sub CPU 102a confirms the storage area of the effect information in the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1309-3-9, corresponds to the stop display of the effect symbol related to the present effect symbol stop display pattern determination process. It is confirmed whether or not the zone turning effect is executed in the changing effect (the changing effect to be performed in the future). If the sub CPU 102a determines that the zone turning effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1309-3-10. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the zone turning effect is not to be executed, the effect symbol stop display pattern determination process ends.

  In step S1309-3-10, the sub CPU 102a performs the effect symbol stop display pattern determination for the zone turning effect using the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table for the zone turning effect stored in the sub ROM 102b. In the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table for the zone effect, the type of the zone effect and the special symbol used for the stop display of the effect symbol are stored in association with each other.

  In step S1309-3-11, the sub CPU 102a sets an effect symbol stop display control command for turning effect corresponding to the effect symbol stop display pattern determined in 1300-3-10 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  The effect symbol stop display control command for zone turning effect set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1700. Then, when the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect symbol stop display control command for the zone turning effect, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the effect is based on the effect symbol stop display pattern indicated by the command. The display stop of the symbol is executed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 in preference to the stop display of the effect symbol based on the normal effect symbol stop display control command.

  In the successful turning effect, the special symbol related to the turning effect is stopped and displayed for the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. On the other hand, in the turn failure production 1, the special symbol related to the turn production is stopped for the left design and the right design, and the normal design determined in step S1309-3-5 is displayed for the middle design. The stop display of the effect design will be performed. Also, in the failure to produce the second effect, the special symbol related to the given effect is stopped for the left symbol, and the normal effect determined in step S1309-3-5 for the right symbol and the middle symbol. The symbol stop display is performed.

(Change control pattern determination processing of effect control board)
The variation effect pattern determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1311-1, the current effect mode is confirmed by referring to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and the variation effect pattern determination associated with the current effect mode is made. A table (for example, see FIG. 68) is selected. This is because the variation effect pattern determination table for determining the effect contents of the variation effect is provided for each effect mode (effect modes A to C).

  As shown in FIG. 68, the variation effect pattern determination table associated with each effect mode includes a special diagram variation pattern designation command, the variation effect pattern selection rate, the type of variation effect pattern to be selected, and the variation effect pattern. Are associated with a variation effect control command corresponding to, a variation effect time corresponding to a variation effect pattern, and a variation effect effect mode.

  The variation effect pattern is an effect aspect of the variation effect, and by determining the variation effect pattern, the image display device 14, the audio output device 15, the effect lighting device 16, the effect accessory device 17, and The specific effect mode of the change effect performed by the effect button device 18 is also determined. For example, the effect mode of the change effect in the image display device 14 includes a display mode of change display of the effect symbol, a display mode related to an object image composed of characters or the like, a background image, and the like.

  In addition, although not shown, the effect mode of the change effect includes the change display mode of the effect symbol, the presence / absence of the reach effect, the content of the reach effect, the presence / absence of the effect button effect, the content of the effect button effect, the effect development configuration, etc. The components of the fluctuation effect are associated with each other.

  In step S1311-2, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and associates it with the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation presentation pattern determination table. Select a judgment table. This is because each variation effect pattern determination table provided for each effect mode is divided into detailed determination tables by special figure variation pattern designation commands.

  The sub CPU 102a acquires the random value indicated by the random number counter related to the random effect pattern determination random number in Step S1311- 3 and selects the acquired variable effect pattern determination random number in Step S1311-2 in Step S1311-4. The variation effect pattern determination is performed in which the variation effect pattern is determined by collating with the determination table.

  In step S1311-5, the sub CPU 102a sets a variable effect control command corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1311-6, the variable effect time that is the effect time of the variable effect is set. In step S1311-7, the variable effect data corresponding to the variable effect pattern is set in the variable effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  The variation effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the fluctuation effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 cause the effect display device such as the image display device 14 to execute the change effect based on the change effect pattern indicated by the command.

  The variation effect timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S1200. The sub CPU 102a can specify the remaining time of the variation effect, in other words, the time elapsed since the variation effect was started, by the variation effect timer counter.

◆ (Pre-read zone production start judgment process of production control board)
The prefetch zone effect start determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1310-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the prefetch zone effect scenario indicated by the prefetch zone effect scenario data stored in the storage area of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1310-2, the prefetch zone effect execution is performed. It is determined whether or not the prefetch zone effect is executed with the (current) variation effect corresponding to the special figure variation pattern designation command related to the determination process. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the prefetch zone effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1310-3. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the prefetch zone effect is not to be executed, the prefetch zone effect start determination process ends.

  In step S1310-3, the sub CPU 102a sets a prefetch zone effect control command corresponding to the prefetch zone effect scenario in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1310-4, the sub CPU 102c sets an icon effect control command for prefetch zone effect. Set to the send buffer.

  The prefetch zone effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. The lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 cause the pre-read zone effect to be executed with the current variation effect when the pre-read zone effect control command is received, and the current time when the pre-read zone effect control command is not received. The pre-read zone effect is not executed with the fluctuation effect.

  Further, the icon effect control command for prefetch zone effect set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. When receiving the icon effect control command for the prefetch zone effect, the image control board 105 changes the currently displayed icon display mode to the prefetch zone effect notification mode when the icon display mode is not the prefetch zone effect notification mode. When the icon control command for prefetch zone effect is received, the image control board 105 continues the prefetch zone effect notification mode if the icon is already displayed in the prefetch zone effect notification mode.

◆ (Determination control process for changing icons during production control board fluctuation)
Next, the icon change notice determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1312-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the icon display mode scenario data stored in the storage area of the presentation information in the sub RAM 102c. In step S1312-2, the special CPU changes related to the icon change notice determination processing. It is determined whether or not to perform the throwing kiss notice with the variation effect (this time) corresponding to the pattern designation command.

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that the throwing kiss notice is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1312-3, and if the sub CPU 102a determines that the throwing kiss notice is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1312-4.

  In step S1312, the sub CPU 102a sets a throwing kiss notice effect control command indicating the contents of the effect corresponding to the icon display mode scenario confirmed in step S1312-1 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and determines this icon change notice. The process ends. Here, in the “production contents according to the icon display scenario”, whether the character related to the throwing kiss notices whether to throw or leave, and the icon that the thrown heart hits when throwing kiss (the notice of the notice) The target icon), whether or not to change the display mode of the icon, and the display mode after the change when changing the icon.

  The throwing kiss notice effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. When the image control board 105 receives the throw kiss notice effect control command, the image control board 105 causes the throw kiss notice to be executed according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the received throw kiss notice effect control command. Details of the throwing kiss notice will be described later.

  In step S1312-4, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not to execute the handshake meeting notice with the (current) variation effect corresponding to the special figure variation pattern designation command related to the icon variation determination process.

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that the handshake meeting advance notice is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1312-2, and if it determines that the handshake meeting advance notice is not to be executed, the sub CPU 102a ends the icon change notice determination process.

  In step S1312-5, the sub CPU 102a sets a handshake meeting notice effect control command indicating the contents of the effect corresponding to the icon display mode scenario confirmed in step S1312-1 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and determines whether the icon change notice is present. The process ends. Here, the “production contents according to the icon display mode scenario” includes the number of dialogues in the handshake meeting notice and the change pattern of the display mode of the changing icon.

  The handshake meeting notice effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. When receiving the handshake meeting notice effect control command, the image control board 105 executes the handshake meeting notice according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the received handshake meeting notice effect control command. Details of the handshake meeting notice will be described later.

(Production control board production mode setting process)
Next, the effect mode setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1315-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the effect symbol designation command stored in the storage area of the effect information of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1315-2, the result of the jackpot determination indicated by the effect symbol designation command. It is determined whether or not is lost. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is a loss, it moves the process to step S1315-3, and if it determines that it is not a loss, it moves the process to step S1315-7.

  In step S1315-7, the sub CPU 102a is associated with the result of the special symbol determination and stored in the sub ROM 102b based on the result of the special symbol determination indicated by the effect symbol designation command confirmed in step S1315-1. A mode determination table is selected (see FIG. 69).

  As shown in FIG. 69, the effect mode determination table includes the determination result of special symbol determination, the selection rate (%) of the effect mode for each special symbol, the type of effect mode to be selected, and the effect mode flag corresponding to the effect mode. The production mode executable count (Ma) is associated.

  The number of performance mode executions is the number of variable effects that can be executed in the effect mode. The effect mode remaining number counter indicates the remaining number of fluctuation effects that can be executed in a specific effect mode in which the effect mode executable number (Ma) is set (M: remaining number of effect modes).

  In step S1315-8, the sub CPU 102a acquires the effect mode determination random number indicated by the effect mode determination random number counter. In step S1315-9, the sub CPU 102a compares the acquired effect mode determination random number with the effect mode determination table. Determine the production mode.

  Then, in step S1315-10, the sub CPU 102a stores an effect mode flag corresponding to the determined effect mode in the effect mode flag storage area, and the number of executions of the effect mode associated with the effect mode (Ma). Is set in the effect mode remaining number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c, and the effect mode setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in step S1315-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the presentation mode A is currently set, that is, whether the presentation mode flag “00H” is set in the presentation mode flag storage area.

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that the mode is effect mode A, it moves the process to step 1315-11. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is not the production mode A, in step S1315-4, the counter value of the production mode remaining number counter is decremented by “1” to update the remaining number (M) of the production mode, and step 1315-5. In step S1, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter is “0”.

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter is not “0”, the sub CPU 102a ends the effect mode setting process. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value is “0”, the effect is displayed in step S1315-6. The mode flag “00H” is set in the effect mode flag storage area (effect mode A is set), and the effect mode setting process ends.

  In step S1315-11, the sub CPU 102a checks the pre-read zone effect scenario indicated by the pre-read zone effect scenario data stored in the storage area of the effect information of the sub RAM 102c, and performs the change effect corresponding to the present effect mode setting process. It is determined whether or not to end the prefetch zone effect. If the sub CPU 102a determines to end the prefetch zone effect, the process proceeds to step S1315-12. If the sub CPU 102a determines not to end the prefetch zone effect, the process proceeds to step S1315-14.

  In step S1315-12, the sub CPU 102a ends the prefetch zone effect and sets a prefetch zone effect end control command for returning to the background image for the effect mode A to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1315-13. An icon effect control command (hereinafter referred to as a “first reset icon effect control command”) that changes the display mode of all icons displayed in the pre-read zone effect notification mode to the normal mode by executing the pre-read zone effect. Set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c.

  The prefetch zone effect end control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. Upon receiving the pre-read zone effect end control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 end the pre-read zone effect, and change the background image, BGM, and the lighting effect mode of the effect lighting device 16 for the effect mode A. Return to the thing.

  Further, the first reset icon effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. When receiving the first reset icon effect control command, the image control board 105 changes the display mode of all icons displayed in the pre-read zone effect notification mode to the normal mode.

  In step S1315-14, the sub CPU 102a confirms the zone precursor effect scenario indicated by the zone precursor effect scenario data stored in the storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and changes the effect corresponding to the effect mode setting process. It is determined whether or not to end the gasse zone sign effect. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the gaze zone sign effect is to be ended, it moves the process to step S1315-15, and if it determines that the gase zone sign effect is not to be ended, ends the effect mode setting process.

  In step S1315-15, the sub CPU 102a executes an icon effect control command (hereinafter referred to as “second”) to change the display mode of all icons displayed in the pre-read zone effect suggestion mode to the normal mode by executing the gasse zone precursor effect. "Reset icon effect control command") is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c.

  Further, the second reset icon effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. When receiving the second reset icon effect control command, the image control board 105 changes the display mode of all icons displayed in the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode to the normal mode.

(Processing board execution decision process for production control board)
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the general drawing effect execution determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described.

  In step S1323-1, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the current state is the non-short-time gaming state. If the sub-CPU 102a determines that the current state is the non-short-time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1323-2. If determined, the ordinary drawing effect execution determination process is terminated.

  In step S1323-2, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the result of the normal symbol determination specified by the received normal pattern variation pattern designation command, and in step S1323-3, the result of the normal symbol determination is only during the non-time saving gaming state. It is determined whether or not it is a hit 2, and if it is determined that it is a hit 2, the process proceeds to step S1323-7, and if it is determined that it is not a hit 2, the process proceeds to step S1323-4.

  In step S1323-4, the sub CPU 102a acquires the random number for determining the ordinary drawing effect, stores it in the random number storage area for determining the ordinary drawing effect in the sub RAM 102c, and determines whether to execute the ordinary drawing effect in step S1323-5. Specifically, whether or not to execute the general drawing effect (roulette effect) by collating the random number for determining the normal drawing effect with the normal drawing effect execution determination table (see FIG. 70A) stored in the sub ROM 102b. Determine whether. The normal drawing effect is basically a notification effect that is executed during the normal symbol fluctuation display based on the reception of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern designation command and notifies (notifies) the result of the normal symbol determination. The contents of the ordinary drawing effect will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (a), the ordinary drawing effect execution determination table is stored in the sub-ROM 102b, and the ordinary drawing effect execution determination value and the determination result as to whether or not to execute the ordinary drawing effect are associated with each other. Stored. Specifically, when the random number for determining the normal drawing effect is 0 to 1, it is determined to execute the normal drawing effect, and when the random number for determining the normal drawing effect is 2 to 36, it is determined not to execute the normal drawing effect. The In other words, in the present embodiment, when the result of the normal symbol determination is a loss or a hit of 1, the normal drawing effect is executed with a probability of about 5%, and when the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit of 2, the probability of 100% The usual drawing production will be executed.

  In step S1323-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the result of the ordinary drawing effect is to execute the ordinary drawing effect. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the ordinary drawing effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1323-7. If it is determined that the ordinary drawing effect is not executed, the ordinary drawing effect execution determination process is terminated.

  In step S1323-7, the sub CPU 102a sets the ordinary drawing effect standby time (in this embodiment, “5.0 seconds”) in the ordinary drawing effect timer counter of the sub RAM 102c. A general drawing production standby flag indicating a standby period for performing the production (hereinafter referred to as “normal drawing production standby time”) is set in the normal drawing production waiting flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and the normal drawing production execution is performed. The determination process ends.

  In the present embodiment, the result of the normal symbol determination is determined by the normal pattern variation pattern designation command received from the main control board 101, but the normal symbol determination is performed by the normal performance symbol designation command received from the main control board 101. The result may be specified, or the result of the normal symbol determination may be specified by both the normal effect symbol designation command and the common symbol variation pattern designation command.

  In addition, when the result of normal symbol determination is specified by both the normal effect design designation command and the normal pattern change pattern specification command, both the normal design effect specification command and the normal pattern change pattern specification command can be received normally. The execution of the ordinary drawing effect may be permitted, and the execution of the ordinary drawing effect may be restricted when it is not received normally.

  Furthermore, when the result of the normal symbol variation display specified by the normal symbol design command matches the result of the normal symbol variation display specified by the common symbol variation pattern designation command (no command abnormality), Execution may be permitted, and execution of the usual drawing effect may be restricted when they do not match (command abnormality).

(Execution control board long open effect execution determination process)
Next, the long open effect execution determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1325-1, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the current state is in the non-time saving gaming state (normal gaming state). If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is in the non-time saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S1325-2. If it is determined that it is not in the non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state), the long opening effect execution determination process is terminated.

  In step S1325-2, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the winning type specified by the received auxiliary game opening designation command. In step S13225-3, the sub CPU 102a receives the second auxiliary game (non- If it is determined whether or not the second auxiliary game is to be started from now on, it is determined that the second auxiliary game is to be started. Step S1325-4 When the process is shifted to and it is determined that the game is not the second auxiliary game, the long opening effect execution determination process is ended.

  In step S1325-4, the sub CPU 102a sets a long opening effect control command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1325-5, the sub CPU 102a sets a long opening effect execution flag in the long opening effect flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1325-6, the time required for the long opening effect (long opening effect execution time) is set in the ordinary drawing effect timer counter, and the long opening effect execution determination process is terminated.

  The long opening effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. For example, when receiving the long opening effect control command, the image control board 105 displays the long opening effect of the effect content indicated by the command on the image display device 14 when the second start port 7 is opened for the first time. Let The long opening effect will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, even when the ordinary drawing effect (notification effect) is executed, if the time when the second auxiliary game is executed is not in a non-time-saving gaming state such as a jackpot game or the like, it is long open. The production is not executed, but if the game is in a non-time-short game state such as a big hit game during execution of the long release production, the long release production may be ended halfway or executed until the end. You may do it.

(General drawing system effect control processing of effect control board)
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the common drawing effect control process by the effect control board 102 will be described.

  In step S <b> 1410, the sub CPU 102 a performs an ordinary drawing effect control process for controlling the effect mode (contents) of the ordinary drawing effect and the progress of the ordinary drawing effect. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1450, the sub CPU 102a performs a long opening effect control process for controlling the progress of the long opening effect. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

◇ (Normal control control process of effect control board)
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the general drawing effect control process by the effect control board 102 will be described.

  In step S1411, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the normal drawing effect standby flag is set in the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the ordinary drawing effect standby flag is set, it moves the process to step S1412. If it determines that the ordinary drawing effect standby flag is not set, it moves the process to step S1421.

  In step S1412, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the ordinary drawing effect standby time set in step S1323-6 has elapsed (ordinary drawing effect timer counter = 0?), That is, whether or not the ordinary drawing effect standby time has ended. If it is determined that the ordinary drawing effect standby time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1413. If it is determined that the ordinary drawing effect standby time has not elapsed, the ordinary drawing effect control process is terminated.

  In step S1413, the sub CPU 102a clears the ordinary drawing effect standby flag. In step S1414, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the execution of the ordinary drawing effect is prohibited. If it is determined that it is not, the process proceeds to step S1415. If it is determined that it is the normal drawing effect prohibition period, the normal drawing effect control process is terminated.

  Although the usual drawing effect prohibition period can be set as appropriate, in this embodiment, during the jackpot game, during the jackpot game, the short-time state, and the remaining 15 seconds of the variable effect with a variable effect time of 30 seconds or more are set. ing.

  In step S1415, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the normal symbol determination result related to the current ordinary drawing effect is “win 2”, and the normal symbol determination result is not “win 2” (lost, win 1). If it is determined, the process proceeds to step S1416. If it is determined that the normal symbol determination result is “win 2”, the process proceeds to step S1417.

  In step S 1416, the sub CPU 102 a determines whether or not the special symbol variation display (variation rendering) currently being executed in the ordinary drawing performance suggests a degree of expectation that is a big hit, and if so, the jackpot winning suggestion designation is designated. A jackpot winning suggestion effect execution determination process for setting a flag is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1417, the sub CPU 102a selects a general drawing effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 70 (b)) for determining the effect mode (contents) of the normal drawing effect, and based on this normal drawing effect pattern determination table. The ordinary drawing effect pattern determination is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (b), the ordinary drawing effect pattern determination table is stored in the sub ROM 102b, and there is a usual figure variation pattern designation command, presence / absence of a jackpot winning suggestion indication designation flag, ON / OFF of an effect restriction flag, The selection rate of the ordinary drawing effect pattern (type of ordinary drawing effect control command) and the remarks indicating the effect form of the ordinary drawing effect are associated with each other.

  The regular drawing effect is “X” symbol that informs (suggests) that the result of the normal symbol determination is lost or hit 1, and “Dango” symbol that notifies (suggests) that the result of the normal symbol determination is 2. The “fever” symbol that suggests (informs) the expectation that the special symbol variation display (variation effect) that is currently being executed will be a big hit, the result of the normal symbol judgment and the big hit expectation cannot be grasped. This is performed by a roulette effect in which a reel including at least one of symbols is variably displayed and then any symbol included in the reel is stopped and displayed.

  In the remarks indicating the production mode of the ordinary drawing effect, the symbol arrangement included in the reel in the roulette effect is associated with the type of the symbol to be stopped and displayed. In addition, the design that suggests (notifies) the degree of expectation that the fluctuation display (fluctuation effect) of the special symbol currently being executed will be a big hit is not limited to the “hot” design, and the degree of expectation that will be a big hit is expressed numerically. Such an expected value design (“10%”, “30%”, “50%”, “100%”, etc.), etc., and an effect mode that is executed in a variable effect so as to indirectly suggest the degree of expectation that is a big hit Production mode symbols ("reach", "pseudo-ream", "SP reach", "SPSP reach") may be included.

  In step S1418, the sub CPU 102a sets a general drawing effect control command corresponding to the determined general drawing effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1419, the normal drawing effect execution time (which is the time required for the normal drawing effect) In this embodiment, “10.5 seconds”) is set in the ordinary drawing effect timer counter, and in step S1420, the ordinary drawing effect is executed in the ordinary drawing effect execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. The effect execution flag is set, and the ordinary drawing effect control process is terminated.

  The set general drawing effect control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the ordinary drawing effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 execute the ordinary drawing effect. As described above, the universal drawing effect control command includes information for controlling the universal drawing effect.

  In step S1421, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the normal drawing effect execution flag is set. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the normal drawing effect execution flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1422, and the normal drawing effect execution flag is set. If it is determined that the execution flag is not set, the ordinary drawing effect control process is terminated.

  In step S1422, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the normal drawing effect execution time set in step S1419 has elapsed (normal drawing effect timer counter = 0?), That is, whether or not the normal drawing effect ends. If it is determined that the ordinary drawing effect execution time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1423. If it is determined that the ordinary drawing effect execution time has not elapsed, the ordinary drawing effect execution control process is terminated.

  In step S <b> 1423, the sub CPU 102 a clears the normal drawing effect execution flag indicating that the normal drawing effect is being executed, and ends the normal drawing effect control process.

(Employment control execution decision process for the effect control board)
With reference to FIG. 52, the jackpot winning suggestion effect execution determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described.

  In step S1416-1, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not it is currently in the execution period of the changing effect. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is in the execution period of the changing effect, the process proceeds to step S1416-2. If it is determined that it is not during the execution period, the process proceeds to step S1416-6. Even if the variation effect is not executed due to a command abnormality, it is determined that it is the execution period of the variation effect since it is a period in which the variation effect is supposed to be executed.

  In step S1416-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect restriction flag in the effect restriction flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c is OFF, and if it is determined that the effect restriction flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S1416-3. If it is determined that the effect restriction flag is not OFF, the process proceeds to step S1416-6.

  In step S1416-3, the sub CPU 102a selects a jackpot winning suggestion effect execution determination table (see FIG. 70 (c)) for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot winning suggestion effect, and the currently executed variable effect. Are compared with the jackpot winning suggestion effect determination table to determine whether or not to win the jackpot winning suggestion effect. Note that the jackpot winning suggestion effect (roulette effect) is executed in the same (similar) manner, although the design to stop is different from the ordinary drawing effect, and the expectation that the currently running variation effect will be a jackpot This is a suggestion effect that suggests (notifies). The contents of the jackpot winning suggestion effect will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (c), the jackpot winning suggestion effect execution determination table is stored in the sub ROM 102b, and the type of the variation effect pattern is associated with the determination result of whether or not the jackpot winning suggestion effect is executed. ing. More specifically, basically, it is determined that the jackpot winning suggestion effect is executed when the variation effect pattern currently being executed is a variation effect pattern with a high expectation level that is a big hit, and the variation effect currently being executed is determined. It is determined not to execute the jackpot winning suggestion effect when the effect mode is a variation effect pattern with a low expectation level and when the variation effect pattern is indefinite (the variation effect is not executed due to a command abnormality).

  In step S1416-4, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot winning suggestion effect execution determination is to execute the jackpot winning suggestion effect. If the sub CPU 102a determines to execute the jackpot winning suggestion effect, the process proceeds to step S1416-5. If it is determined that the jackpot winning suggestion effect is not executed, the process proceeds to step S1416-6.

  In step S 1416-5, the sub CPU 102 a sets a jackpot winning suggestion presentation designation flag in the jackpot winning suggestion presentation designation flag storage area of the sub RAM 102 c, and ends the big jackpot winning suggestion presentation execution determination process.

  In step S 1416-6, the sub CPU 102 a clears the jackpot winning suggestion presentation designation flag stored in the jackpot winning suggestion presentation designation flag storage area of the sub RAM 102 c, and ends the main jackpot winning suggestion presentation execution determination process.

  As described above, according to FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, even when the effect restriction flag is ON during the execution period of the variable effect, that is, even when the variable effect is not executed due to a command abnormality, The performance itself is not restricted, so that the regular drawing effect is executed during the period when the variable effect cannot be executed, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous, thereby improving the fun of the game. It becomes possible to make it.

  In addition, if the effect restriction flag is OFF during the execution period of the variable effect, that is, if the variable effect is being executed instead of the command abnormality, a special symbol is used as the normal drawing effect pattern of the normal drawing effect (roulette effect). It is possible to select a general drawing production pattern that includes a notice pattern (for example, a “hot heat” design) that suggests (notifies) the expectation that the fluctuation display (variation production) will be a big hit. ), It is possible to execute a jackpot winning suggestion effect.

  On the other hand, if the effect restriction flag is ON during the execution period of the variable effect, that is, if the variable effect is not executed due to a command abnormality, the special symbol change display is used as the normal drawing effect pattern of the normal drawing effect (roulette effect). A notice pattern that suggests (notifies) the expectation that (fluctuation effect) will be a big hit (for example, a “hot” design) is selected as a normal figure production pattern that is not included in the reel. Winning suggestion will not be executed.

  Therefore, despite the fact that the fluctuating effect is not executed, the notice symbol that suggests (notifies) the expected degree that the special symbol fluctuating display (fluctuating effect) is a big hit in the reel arrangement in the ordinary drawing effect (roulette effect) is arranged By doing so, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player who visually recognizes the game is awakened, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

  Note that if the production restriction flag is ON during the execution period of the fluctuation effect, that is, if the fluctuation effect is not executed due to a command abnormality, the expectation that the special symbol fluctuation display (fluctuation effect) will be a big hit from the reel arrangement. The special symbol included in the reel arrangement is reduced to two or one by executing the general symbol effect (roulette effect) by deleting the notice symbol to be suggested (notified) (for example, the “hot heat” symbol). Also good.

  In addition, if the production restriction flag is ON, that is, if the production of the fluctuation effect is not executed due to a command abnormality, and the result of the normal drawing effect is “×” symbol, the normal drawing effect itself May not be executed.

  In addition, even when a variation effect is not executed due to a command abnormality, it is possible to select a general-purpose effect pattern that includes a notice symbol that suggests (notifies) the expectation that the variation display (variation effect) of a special symbol will be a big hit In that case, the notice symbol should not be stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when the result of the normal symbol determination is a losing or winning one, the normal drawing effect or the jackpot winning suggestion effect is executed with a predetermined probability (5%), but the fluctuation effect is not executed due to a command abnormality During the waiting period during which no medium or variable effects are executed, the normal drawing effects may be executed with a probability (for example, 25%) different from the predetermined probability. The execution probabilities of the graphic effects may be different, and even in such a case, the normal graphic effects should be executed with a probability higher than a predetermined probability. If it does in this way, even if it is a period when a change production is not performed, it will become possible to improve the interest of a game by a usual drawing production.

  In addition, the result of the universal drawing effect is derived in accordance with the stop of the normal symbol variation display executed by the normal symbol display device 22, but a predetermined period ( For example, the result of the ordinary drawing effect may be derived one second before, and the long opening effect may be started before the change display of the normal symbol is stopped. In this way, it is possible to secure a long period for executing the long opening effect executed after the end of the ordinary drawing effect, and it is possible to execute the long opening effect rich in interest.

(Long opening effect control processing of effect control board)
The long open effect control process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1451, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the long opening effect execution flag is set in the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the long opening effect execution flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1452. If it is determined that the effect execution flag is not set, the long open effect control process is terminated.

  In step S1452, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the long opening effect execution time set in step S1325-6 has elapsed (ordinary effect timer counter = 0?), That is, whether or not the long opening effect ends. If it is determined that the long opening effect execution time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1453. If it is determined that the long opening effect execution time has not elapsed, the long opening effect execution control process ends.

  In step S1453, the sub CPU 102a clears the long opening effect execution flag indicating that the long opening effect is being executed, and ends the long opening effect control process.

(Handshake meeting notice)
Next, the handshake meeting notice will be described. The handshake meeting notice is composed of a combination of a pending icon change notice and a changing icon change notice, and a changing icon is displayed by a handshake meeting (operation including conversation) between the changing icon and a predetermined character in a special mode. It is a notice effect of whether or not the expectation degree of winning the jackpot winning of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the changing icon is improved by changing the aspect (so-called “whether or not the chance is increased”), and is performed based on the preliminary determination result This is a kind of prefetching notice (continuous notice effect). First, an effect flow of handshake meeting notice will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the changing icon that is the target of the handshake meeting notice is displayed in the changing icon display area 142 and the change display (change effect) of the effect design is started, the changing icon display area 142 is first displayed as the handshake meeting notice. A handshake meeting venue appears in the vicinity of the icon, and the silhouette of the person related to the changing icon, the handshake character that shakes the handshake, and the escort character that escorts the handshake character appear at predetermined positions on the display unit 140.

  Then, when the handshake character and the changing icon shake hands and a predetermined line appears from the handshake character along with the handshake, the color starts to gradually change from under the changing icon, and the changing icon color changes. An effect of whether or not it changes (whether or not the display mode of the changing icon changes) (hereinafter referred to as “changed icon color change effect”) is executed. When the color changes completely (the color change succeeds), it becomes a so-called “promotion success (chance up)”, and the big win expectation degree for the changing icon increases, while the color change ends in the middle, When returning to the color before the changing icon color change effect is performed (the color change fails), the so-called “promotion failure” occurs, and the jackpot winning expectation for the changing icon is maintained.

  When the first changing icon color change effect is finished, the second dialogue appears again from the handshake character and the handshake meeting notice continues, and the escort character is withdrawn from the changing icon. To branch when the handshake meeting notice ends.

  When the second dialogue appears again from the handshake character and the handshake meeting notice continues, the second changing icon color change effect is performed. And, as with the case of the first time, the color change change effect during the second change is also completely changed (successful color change) and promoted successfully (chance up), or the color change is halfway Finished (color change failed) and failed promotion.

  When the second variation icon color change effect is finished, the third dialogue appears again from the handshake character, and when the handshake event notice continues, the escort character leaves the changing icon. A branch is made when guidance is given and the handshake meeting notice ends.

  When the third dialogue appears from the handshake character and the handshake meeting notice continues, a third variation icon color change whirling effect is executed. And, as in the case of the first and second times, the icon color change whirling effect during the third change is either a complete change in color and a successful promotion (chance up), or the color change ends in the middle Promotion failure.

  When the third changing icon color changing effect is finished, the fourth dialogue appears from the handshake character and the handshake meeting notice continues further, and the escort character provides exit guidance for the changing icon. Go and branch when the handshake meeting notice ends.

  When the 4th dialogue appears from the handshake character and the handshake meeting notice continues, the 4th change icon color change whirling production always changes completely and the promotion succeeds (chance up). The escort character provides exit guidance for the changing icon, and the handshake meeting notice ends.

  Next, the handshake meeting notice will be described using a specific example. For example, as shown in FIG. 79 (a), when the hold icons A10 to A12 in the normal mode are displayed on the first display unit 141a to the third display unit 141c of the first hold icon display area 141, It is assumed that the effect design shown is stopped.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 (b) to 79 (c), the hold icons A10 to A12 displayed on the first display unit 141a to the third display unit 141c are the changing icon display region 142, the first While shifting to the display parts 141a and 141b, the change display of a production | presentation symbol is started. Since the hold icon A10 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A10 changes to the changing icon A10.

  When the effect symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) is being executed, a game ball enters the first start port 6, and a first special diagram hold is newly generated. In response to the occurrence of the special figure hold, the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and it is determined that the handshake meeting notice is executed in the start opening prize process, and the number of lines of the handshake meeting notice is two times. “When the prize is awarded, the color of the changing icon in the fourth special mode 21 → the first dialogue changes to green (fourth special mode 12) → the color of the changing icon in the second dialogue is red (the fourth It is assumed that an icon display mode scenario for previewing a handshake meeting with the effect content changing to the special mode 13) is selected.

  In this case, first, as shown in FIG. 80A, the hold icon A13 corresponding to the newly generated first special figure hold is displayed in the fourth special mode 21. At this time, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the display mode of the changing icon A10 does not change, but the holding icons A11 and A12 corresponding to the preceding holding for the newly generated first special figure holding are the fourth special icons. While changing to the aspect 41, as shown in FIG. 80C, the handshake meeting venue AK appears in the vicinity of the changing icon display area 142 while being partially hidden in the effect EF1.

  When the handshake event notice is executed based on the occurrence of the first special figure hold, the hold icon A13 is displayed in the fourth special mode 21, and the hold icons A11 and A12 are displayed in the fourth special mode 41. However, a heart is attached to the chest portion of the silhouette of the person related to the hold icon A13 that is the subject of the handshake event notice so that the player can easily recognize the subject of the handshake event notice. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 80 (d), when the effect EF1 is deleted, the handshake character C1 that performs the handshake according to the handshake meeting notice and the character C2 that protects the handshake character C1 appear at the handshake meeting place AK. To do.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (a), the effect symbol indicating the loss is stopped and the changing icon A10 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 81 (b), it corresponds to the hold icon A11. When the change display of the effect symbols to be started is started, the hold icons A11 to A13 are shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display portions 141a and 141b, respectively. Here, since the hold icon A11 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A11 is changed to the changing icon A11, and the display mode is changed from the fourth special mode 41 to the fourth special mode 31 with the shift. Change.

  Further, as soon as the changing icon A11 is displayed in the changing icon display area 142, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), the silhouette of the person related to the changing icon A11 and the handshake character C1 shake hands. Here, since the changing icon A11 is not the target of the jackpot winning expectation degree related to the handshake meeting notice, the dialogue does not appear from the handshake character C1, and the display mode (color) of the changing icon A11 also changes. do not do.

  81 (b) and 81 (c), the hold icon A13 of the fourth special mode 21, the hold icon A12 of the fourth special mode 41, and the changing icon A11 of the fourth special mode 31 are displayed. In other words, when a game ball enters the first start port 6 while the handshake meeting notice suggestion effect is being executed, the hold icon A14 corresponding to the ball is displayed in a normal manner. The

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the handshake meeting notice is to be executed, this occurs when the ball enters the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 before the handshake meeting notice ends. This is because execution of the icon change notice is prohibited for the hold icon corresponding to the special figure hold. However, the icon display mode determined by permitting the execution of the icon change notice for the hold icon corresponding to the special figure hold generated by entering the first start port 6 or the like before the handshake meeting notice is finished. It is also possible to display the hold icon A14 in a predetermined special mode based on the scenario.

  As soon as the change display of the effect symbol corresponding to the changing icon A11 is finished, as shown in FIG. 81 (d), the guard character C2 performs an operation of checking the clock, and the change display of the effect design is finished. I suggest that. When the changing effect design starts to stop, as shown in FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (b), the escort character C2 performs an exit guidance operation on the changing icon A11 and shakes hands. The character C1 performs an action (bye-bye) to say goodbye to the changing icon A11, and the changing icon A11 is reduced as if leaving. As shown in FIG. 82 (c), when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the changing icon A11 is completely erased, and the handshake character C1 and the escort character C2 return to the standby state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (a), the hold icon A13 that is the target of the handshake meeting notice is shifted from the first display unit 141a to the changing icon display area 142, and the changing icon of the fourth special mode 11 is displayed. As soon as A13 is reached, the silhouette of the person related to the changing icon A13 and the handshake character C1 shake hands.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (a), when a game ball enters the first start port 6 while the handshake event notice is being executed, the hold icon A15 corresponding to the ball is displayed in the normal mode. Is done. In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the handshake meeting notice is to be executed, this occurs when the ball enters the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 before the handshake meeting notice ends. This is because execution of the icon change notice is prohibited for the hold icon corresponding to the special figure hold. However, the icon display mode determined by permitting the execution of the icon change notice for the hold icon corresponding to the special figure hold generated by entering the first start port 6 or the like before the handshake meeting notice is finished. It is also possible to display the hold icon A14 in a predetermined special mode based on the scenario.

  When the shaking icon A13 and the handshake character C1 in the fourth special mode 11 are shaken, the first dialogue appears from the handshake character C1 as shown in FIG. 83 (b), and FIG. 83 (c). As shown in FIG. 5, the changing icon color change effect is executed in which the color of the changing icon A13 gradually changes from the bottom (here, white to green). Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (d), when the color of the changing icon A13 is completely changed and the color change is successful, the changing icon A13 performs a guts pose and the change (promotion) of the color is successful. The translucent effect EF2 suggesting the success of the color change is displayed on the changing icon A13 so that the changing icon A13 is visible.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (a), when the changing icon A13 continues shaking with the handshake character C1 in the color (here, green) after the change in the changing icon color change effect at the first time. 84 (b), the second dialogue appears from the handshake character C1, and the color of the changing icon A13 gradually changes from the bottom (here, green to red). Skill production is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (c), when the color of the changing icon A13 is completely changed and the color change is successful, the changing icon A13 performs a guts pose again, and the change (promotion) of the color changes. Take action that suggests success.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 85A, the reach state is established, the escort character C2 performs an exit guidance operation for the changing icon A13, and the character C1 is separated from the changing icon A13. When a notification operation (bye-bye) is performed and it is informed that the handshake meeting notice ends, a predetermined reach effect (for example, SP reach) is started, as shown in FIGS. 85 (b) to 85 (c). In addition, the handshake character C1 and the escort character C2 are erased, and the display mode of the changing icon A13 displayed in the fourth special mode 13 is changed to the second special mode 13 common to the red color at that time. The handshake meeting notice ends.

  As described above, the color of the changing icon (in a broad sense, the display mode) is gradually changed by the handshake meeting advance notice, and the changing icon color-changing effect indicating whether the color changes is performed. Thus, by displaying the color change process, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change of the changing icon and easily recognize the change of the changing icon color.

  In the present embodiment, it is the color that changes as the target of the handshake meeting advance notice, but this change target is not limited to the color, and may be the size or shape of the changing icon. Furthermore, the change process can be displayed by appropriately combining a plurality of elements constituting the display mode of the changing icon such as color, size, and shape. When combining multiple elements appropriately, for example, the color changes at the first dialogue appearance, the size changes at the second dialogue appearance, and the shape changes at the third dialogue appearance. It is also possible to change the elements that change according to the order.

  Further, in this embodiment, the handshake event notice is performed based on the prior judgment result, but the jackpot judgment result, the special symbol judgment result, or the special figure fluctuation of the special figure judgment information subject to the handshake meeting notice. It is also possible to perform based on the pattern determination result.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the handshake meeting notice is executed at the start of the change display of the production symbol, but the execution timing of the handshake meeting notice is not limited to this, and is appropriately set according to the contents of the production of the change effect. can do. Other execution timings for handshake meeting notices include pseudo stop or re-variation of pseudo-reams, so-called step-up notices, step-up notices, predetermined cut-in notices, dialogue notices, appearance of characters, or super reach. It can be set as appropriate, for example, when the development effect is executed, when the reach state is established, or when a predetermined action effect is executed by the effect accessory device 17.

  In this embodiment, the handshake event notice is performed for the changing icon, but it can also be performed for the hold icon. In this case, for example, the handshake meeting place appears near any one of the first display part 141a to the fourth display part 141d, and is displayed on the first display part 141a to the fourth display part 141d where the handshake meeting place appears. A handshake event notice may be given to the hold icon, and the process of color change (change in display mode) may be displayed. In this case, the method of determining the content of the handshake meeting notice by the icon display mode scenario determination for the handshake meeting notice in this embodiment (steps S1305-4-7 to S1305-4-11, FIG. 60 to A handshake meeting notice can be made in the same manner as in FIG.

  Further, as another embodiment for performing the handshake meeting advance notice, for example, during the change display of the production symbol, the handshake character shakes all or some of the icons displayed at that time in order. Thus, the handshake meeting notice can be given to display the process of color change (change in display mode). In this case, for example, it can be performed by determining whether or not to execute the handshake meeting notice for any icon when the fluctuating effect is started, and determining the display mode after the change in execution. .

  In the present embodiment, while the icon color change (display mode change) process is displayed, the icon and the handshake character are shaking hands, in other words, the color change target icon. Although an action is being executed, some action is performed once or a plurality of times before the color change target icon changes color, and the color changes after the action ends (for example, a predetermined character appears on the target icon). The color of the target icon changes after the kiss is finished, and the color change can be made easier as the number of actions increases.

  In this embodiment, one to four dialogues appear for one handshake meeting notice, and one changing icon color change effect is performed with the appearance of one dialogue. The Therefore, the more lines that appear in a single handshake event notice, the more likely the color change will be, in other words, the higher the chance of winning a big hit (chance up). You can focus on the appearance of dialogue and improve the fun of the game. In addition, in one handshake event notice, even if the color change fails due to a certain changing icon color change effect, or even if the desired change does not occur, if the next line appears, the player's color Expectation for change (increased expectation of winning jackpot) can be maintained.

  In the present embodiment, one handshake meeting notice is executed in one presentation symbol variation display, but a plurality of handshake meeting notices are executed in one presentation symbol variation display. You can also. And the number of dialogues for each handshake meeting notice in this multiple handshake meeting notice is decided by scenario or independent lottery, and the more the number of lines appearing in multiple handshake meeting notices, the more successful the color change In other words, it is possible to increase the possibility that the expectation degree of winning a big hit will increase (chance up).

  In addition, the greater the number of dialogues, the greater the likelihood of a successful color change, which means that the action is performed on the icon for which the handshake event is being held, in other words, the icon subject to the handshake event. The longer the time is spent, the higher the chance of a successful color change. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the player pay attention to the operation.

  In the present embodiment, the number of dialogues is attributed to the time during which the number of dialogues is shaken because the production content is that one or more dialogues appear while the handshake meeting notices once. However, for example, in one dialogue, it is possible to change the time during which the handshake is changed by the length of the words in one dialogue, with the production content that one or more words are uttered.

  In this embodiment, one to four dialogues appear for one handshake meeting notice, and one changing icon color change effect is performed with the appearance of one dialogue. The Therefore, the greater the number of dialogues that appear in a single handshake meeting notice, the higher the likelihood of successful color change, in other words, the higher the chance of winning a jackpot.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the appearing handshake meeting venue AK, the handshake character C1 and the escort character C2 are set to one type, but a plurality of types are set respectively, and the number of dialogues ( The number of steps for the handshake meeting notice), the time during which the handshake is given (direction time for the handshake meeting notice), and the expected level of success of the color change can be made different.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first dialogue content, the second dialogue content, the third dialogue content, and the fourth dialogue content in the handshake meeting notice are set differently, and each dialogue content is set. Is set to one type. Here, a plurality of dialogue contents are set for each time, and the expected degree of color change success can be varied depending on the dialogue contents. It is also possible to set the content of dialogue depending on the type of handshake character. Further, the handshake character can be selected by the player by operating the selection button 19A and the effect button 18A in a preset period such as a waiting state for customers.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86 (a) to FIG. 86 (d), the variation effect corresponding to the hold icon (previous hold) prior to the hold icon that is the subject of the handshake meeting notice will not be executed due to command abnormality. explain. Fig. 86 (a) is a diagram showing the same scene as Fig. 81 (a), but is different in that a first special symbol display device 20 for performing variable display of the first special symbol is added. .

  As shown in FIG. 86 (a), after a handshake character C1 that performs a handshake according to a handshake meeting notice as a handshake meeting notice suggestion effect and a character C2 that protects the handshake character C1 appear in the handshake meeting place AK, When the effect symbol indicating stop is displayed, the changing icon A10 displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is deleted. At this time, in the first special symbol display device 20, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), at the start timing of the variable symbol display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A11, the first special symbol display device 20 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, The icons A11 to A13 are shifted to shift to the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, and the second display unit 141b, respectively. Here, since the hold icon A11 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A11 is changed to the changing icon A11.

  However, since the processing in steps S1309-3 to S1312 described above is not executed due to the occurrence of a command abnormality, the changing effect corresponding to the changing icon A11 (the changing display of the production symbol) and the changing icon change notice are executed. Instead, the handshake meeting notice suggestion effect executed in the changing icon display area 142 is interrupted. Therefore, the handshake character C1, the character C2, and the handshake meeting venue displayed in the vicinity of the changing icon display area 142 are deleted, and the display mode of the changing icon A11 is maintained as the fourth special mode 41.

  However, even if the fluctuating effect corresponding to the fluctuating icon A11 (the change display of the design symbol) or the fluctuating icon change notice is not executed, the pending hold icon change notice is not interrupted (pending icon). Therefore, the hold icon A12 that is the subject of the handshake meeting notice suggestion effect remains the fourth special mode 41, and the hold icon A13 that is the target of the handshake event notice is the fourth special mode. Keep 21.

  86B, when the hold icon A13 of the fourth special mode 21, the hold icon A12 of the fourth special mode 41, and the changing icon A11 are displayed, the first start port 6 is displayed. When a game ball enters, the hold icon A14 corresponding to the ball is displayed in a normal manner.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (c), when the change display of the first special symbol executed in the first special symbol display device 20 is stopped, the fourth special symbol displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is displayed. The changing icon of aspect 41 is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (d), when the change display of the effect symbol corresponding to the hold icon A12 comes to the start timing, the change display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 20, and the hold is held. The icons A12 to A14 are shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, and the second display unit 141b, respectively. Here, since the hold icon A12 shifts to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A12 changes to the changing icon A12.

  Further, the progress of the handshake meeting notice suggestion effect executed in the changing icon display area 142 is resumed, and the handshake meeting place AK, the handshake character C1 and the character C2 appear in the vicinity of the changing icon display area 142, and the changing icon The display mode of A12 changes from the fourth special mode 41 to the fourth special mode 31, and the silhouette of the person related to the changing icon A12 and the handshake character C1 shake hands. Note that the changing icon A12 is not a target of the jackpot winning expectation degree suggestion related to the handshake meeting notice, so the dialogue does not appear from the handshake character C1, and the display mode (color) of the changing icon A12 does not change. .

  As described above, even when the fluctuating effect corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the handshake event notice suggesting effect is not executed due to the command abnormality, the hold icon is changed from the first hold icon display area 141 to the changing icon display area 142. Since the execution of the hold icon change notice is continued for the remaining hold icons, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to misunderstand the progress of the game, and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. It is possible to improve interest).

  In addition, when the changing effect is not executed due to the command abnormality, the changing icon change notice is not executed, and the handshake meeting notice suggesting effect executed in the changing icon display area 142 is interrupted. Although the game is not executed, only the handshake meeting notice suggestion effect is advanced, so that the player can avoid feeling uncomfortable, and the game shop and the gaming machine are not distrusted.

  In the present embodiment, when the fluctuating effect (changing display of the effect symbol) is not executed due to a command abnormality during execution of the handshake meeting notice (suggesting effect), the changing icon and the hold icon remain in the fourth special mode. However, it is displayed in the normal mode over the period when the variable effect is not executed (the special symbol corresponding to the changing icon is displayed), and then returned to the fourth special mode when the variable effect is executed next. May be. Even in this case, since the display of the changing icon and the hold icon is continued, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to misunderstand the progress of the game.

  Next, a state in which the fluctuating effect corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the handshake meeting notice is not executed due to a command abnormality will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 87 (a) is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 86 (d).

  As shown in FIG. 87 (a), when the effect symbol indicating the loss is stopped, the changing icon A12 displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is deleted. At this time, in the first special symbol display device 20, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), when the start timing of the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A13 is reached, the first special symbol display device 20 starts the change display of the first special symbol and holds the hold. The icons A13 and A14 are shifted to shift to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 141a, respectively. Here, since the hold icon A13 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the holding icon A13 is changed to the changing icon A13.

  However, since the processing in steps S1309-3 to S1312 described above is not executed due to the occurrence of a command abnormality, the changing effect corresponding to the changing icon A11 (the changing display of the production symbol) and the changing icon change notice are executed. The handshake event notice that should be executed in the changing icon display area 142 is not executed. Therefore, the handshake character C1, the character C2, and the handshake meeting venue displayed in the vicinity of the changing icon display area 142 are deleted, and the display mode of the changing icon A11 is maintained as the fourth special mode 21.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), when the changing icon A13 of the fourth special mode 21 and the hold icon A14 of the normal mode are displayed, when a game ball enters the first start port 6, The hold icon A15 corresponding to the incoming ball is displayed in a normal manner.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (c), when the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the first special symbol display device 20 is stopped, the fourth special symbol displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is displayed. The changing icon in the aspect 21 is deleted, and the handshake meeting notice is not executed and the state is completely completed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (d), when the variation display of the effect symbol corresponding to the hold icon A14 comes to the start timing, the first special symbol display device 20 starts the variation display of the first special symbol and holds the hold. The icons A14 to A15 are shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 141a, respectively. Here, since the hold icon A14 shifts to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A14 changes to the changing icon A14.

  As described above, even if the fluctuating effect corresponding to the hold icon that is the subject of the change icon change notice (the handshake meeting notice) is not executed due to a command abnormality, the hold icon changes from the first hold icon display area 141. Since it is shifted to the middle icon display area 142 and the fourth display mode 21 is maintained, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to misunderstand the progress of the game, and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. Can be improved).

  In addition, when the changing effect corresponding to the held icon subject to the changing icon change notice (the handshake meeting notice) is not executed due to a command abnormality, the changing icon change notice is not executed, so the changing effect is not executed. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by executing only the icon change notice (the handshake meeting notice) during the change, and no distrust to the game shop or the gaming machine. .

(Throwing kiss notice)
Next, the throwing kiss notice will be described. The throwing kiss notice is composed of a pending icon change notice and / or a changing icon change notice, and a special character corresponding to the icon by changing the display mode of the icon by a throwing kiss (a motion of flying a heart) by a predetermined character. It is a notice effect of whether or not to improve the expectation degree of winning a lottery (so-called chance up), and is a kind of pre-read notice that is performed based on the result of prior judgment (pending icon change notice and changing) When it is executed by icon change notice, it can also be called a continuous notice effect). First, an effect flow of throwing kiss notice will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the throwing kiss notice is started, a predetermined character first appears at a predetermined position on the display unit 140. In the present embodiment, the throwing kiss notice is executed with the start of the change display (change effect) of the effect symbol.

  The appearing character performs a throwing kiss for flying a heart toward any icon (holding icon or changing icon) that has already been displayed, or leaves without displaying the throwing kiss and disappears from the display unit 140. When the character leaves and disappears from the display unit 140, the throwing kiss notice ends.

  When a character performs a throwing kiss, a heart hits the icon that is the target of the throwing kiss, and a predetermined effect is generated on the icon. If the display mode of the icon changes after the effect disappears, the character disappears after performing an action corresponding to the successful change of the display mode.

  On the other hand, if the icon display mode has not changed after the effect has disappeared, the character disappears after performing an action corresponding to the failure of the display mode change.

  Next, a state in which the throwing kiss notice is executed after the hold icon to be thrown kiss notice changes to the special mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90. For example, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), the normal-type hold icon A21 is displayed on the first display portion 141a of the first hold-icon display area 141, and the normal-type hold icon A20 is displayed in the changing icon display area 142. It is assumed that the change display (change effect) of the effect symbol is performed when displayed.

  Then, a game ball enters the first start port 6 and a new first special figure hold is generated, and a first start port winning designation command is generated according to the occurrence of the first special figure hold. It is determined that the throwing kiss notice is determined to be executed in the start winning process, and the throwing kiss notice is determined as the scenario 93.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), the hold icon A22 corresponding to the newly generated first special figure hold is displayed in the normal manner, and then the effect symbol indicating the loss is stopped and displayed. At the same time, the changing icon A20 is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (c), when the change display of the effect symbol is started, the hold icons A21 to A22 are shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 141a, respectively. Here, since the hold icon A21 shifts to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A21 changes to the changing icon A21. In addition, the display mode of the hold icon A22 changes to the second special mode 13 (red) in accordance with the shift to the first display unit 141a.

  Then, a game ball enters the first start port 6 and a new first special figure hold is generated, and a first start port winning designation command is generated according to the occurrence of the first special figure hold. Suppose that it is determined that the throwing kiss notice is not executed in the start winning process.

  In this case, first, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), the hold icon A23 corresponding to the newly generated first special figure hold is displayed in the normal mode, and thereafter, the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is displayed. At the same time, the changing icon A21 is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), when the change display of the effect symbol is started, the hold icons A22 to A23 are shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display portion 141a, respectively, and the throwing kiss is notified. Such a character C3 appears and the changing icon change notice is started. Here, since the hold icon A22 shifts to the changing icon display area, the hold icon A22 changes to the changing icon A22, and the display form changes from the second special form 13 (red) to the second special form in accordance with the shift. It changes to 14 (zebra pattern).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (c), the character C3 performs a throwing kiss to fly the heart HT toward a predetermined icon. The icon to which the heart HT is skipped is determined by the normal icon display mode scenario indicated by the normal icon display mode scenario data stored in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c. Suppose the heart HT is skipped.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (a), when the heart HT hits the changing icon A20, a predetermined effect is superimposed on the changing icon A20, and the changing icon A20 becomes difficult or invisible. (Not shown).

  Thereafter, when the predetermined effect is deleted, as shown in FIG. 90B, the display mode of the changing icon A22 is changed from the second special mode 14 to the second special mode 15 (rainbow), and “power Up 20% "is displayed in the vicinity of the changing icon A22 that is the target of the throwing kiss notice, and the icon output form from the audio output device 15 is displayed. A sound for notifying the change is output (for example, “power-up” is generated by the voice of the character C3), and the lighting device 16 for lighting performs a lighting effect in a mode dedicated to the change. In the present embodiment, change notification image HG is composed of an image including the text “power-up”, but the display mode is not limited to this and can be set as appropriate.

  The character C3 is erased as shown in FIG. 90 (c) after performing an action corresponding to the successful change of the display mode (in FIG. 90 (b), an action of spreading both hands with a smile). .

  Next, a state in which the fluctuating effect corresponding to the hold icon that is the subject of the throwing kiss notice is not executed due to the command abnormality will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (c). Fig. 91 (a) is a diagram showing the same scene as Fig. 89 (a), but is different in that a first special symbol display device 20 for performing variable display of the first special symbol is added. .

  As shown in FIG. 91A, the hold icon A22 of the second special mode 13 (red) is displayed on the first display unit 141a of the first hold icon display region 141, and the normal icon is displayed in the changing icon display region 142. When the hold icon A23 is displayed and then the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed, the changing icon A21 is deleted. At this time, in the first special symbol display device 20, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), when it comes to the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A22, the first special symbol display device 20 starts the variable display of the first special symbol and holds the hold. The icons A22 and A23 are shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 141a, respectively. Here, since the hold icon A22 shifts to the changing icon display area, the hold icon A22 changes to the changing icon A22, and the display form changes from the second special form 13 (red) to the second special form in accordance with the shift. It changes to 14 (zebra pattern) (hold icon change notice).

  However, since the processing in steps S1309-3 to S1312 described above is not executed due to the occurrence of a command abnormality, the changing effect corresponding to the changing icon A22 (the changing display of the effect symbol) or the changing icon change notice is executed. The throwing kiss advance notice that should be executed in the changing icon display area is not executed. Therefore, the character C3 related to the throwing kiss notice does not appear.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (c), the first special symbol display device 20 continues to display the variation of the first special symbol, but since the character C has not appeared, the character C throws a kiss. An effect of going and flying the heart HT toward a predetermined icon and an effect of changing the display mode of the icon hit by the heart HT are not performed. Although the throwing kiss notice has been described here, the handshake meeting notice is the same as the throwing kiss notice.

  In this way, even when the fluctuating effect corresponding to the hold icon subject to the changing icon change notice (in this case, the throwing kiss notice) is not executed due to a command abnormality, the hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 141. Is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, and the change to the second display mode 14 is made. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to misunderstand the progress of the game and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. (It is possible to improve the interest of the game).

  In addition, when the changing effect corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the changing icon change notice (throwing kiss notice) is not executed due to a command abnormality, the changing icon change notice is not executed, so the changing effect is not executed. However, it is possible to avoid the player from feeling uncomfortable by executing only the icon change notice (throwing kiss notice) during the change, and the game shop and the gaming machine will not be distrusted. .

  Note that the variation effect corresponding to the icon before the hold icon subject to the throwing kiss notice is not executed due to the command abnormality, and the throwing kiss notice is executed during the period of the changing effect that is no longer executed and the hold icon is displayed. Even if it is a scenario that changes the mode (throwing kiss notice is not a changing icon change notice but a holding icon change notice), the throwing kiss notice will not be executed, so the hold icon is displayed at this time The aspect does not change.

  However, even if the throw kiss notice is not executed, when the hold icon that was the subject of the throw kiss notice is shifted to another first hold icon display area due to the decrease in the next special figure hold, Since the display mode of the hold icon is changed to the display mode according to the selected scenario, it changes to the display mode that should have been changed by the throwing kiss notice at this time, or the next display mode according to the scenario. It will be.

  By doing this, it becomes possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player cannot enjoy the pending icon change notice and the changing icon change notice that were originally supposed to be executed, and improve the interest of the game Is possible.

  Further, when the throwing kiss notice for the hold icon is not executed, the throwing kiss notice may be executed in the next variation effect by rewriting the scenario. Even in this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, the throwing kiss notice will be described using another specific example. For example, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), when normal-type (white) hold icons A30 and A31 are displayed on the first display portion 141a and the second display portion 141b of the first hold icon display area 141. Suppose that the effect symbol indicating the loss is stopped.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 92B, the hold icons A30 and A31 displayed on the first display unit 141a and the second display unit 141b are shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 141a, respectively. At the same time, when the effect symbol variation display is started, the character C3 related to the throwing kiss notice appears. Since the hold icon A30 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A30 changes to the changing icon A30.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (c), the character C3 performs a throwing kiss to fly the heart HT toward a predetermined icon. Here, it is assumed that the heart HT is skipped toward the changing icon A30.

  As shown in FIG. 93 (a), when the heart HT hits the changing icon A30, a predetermined effect is superimposed on the changing icon A30, so that the changing icon A30 becomes difficult or invisible. (Not shown).

  Thereafter, when the predetermined effect is deleted, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), the display mode of the changing icon A30 is changed to the second special mode 11 (white) and the audio output device 15 A sound for notifying the change is output (for example, “power-up” is generated by the voice of the character C3), and the lighting device 16 for lighting performs a lighting effect in a mode dedicated to the change.

  Then, the character C3 is erased as shown in FIG. 93 (c) after performing an action corresponding to the successful change of the display mode.

  As described above, when the changing icon changes due to the throwing kiss notice, the display of the notification image B by the image display device 14, the occurrence of “power up” by the audio output device 15, and the effect by the effect lighting device 16 Since the lighting effect in a mode dedicated to the change is notified that the changing icon has changed, the player can easily recognize that the changing icon has changed.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the change notification image B, it is notified that the changing icon is changed by the character C3 performing a successful action in accordance with the change of the changing icon. In this way, since it is notified that the changing icon has changed between the shape and the character, it is easy for the player to understand that the changing icon has changed.

  In the present embodiment, the image display device 14, the audio output device 15, and the effect lighting device 16 notify that the changing icon has changed, but the notification is made of the various devices 14, 15, 16. (For example, any one or any two of the image display device 14, the audio output device 15, and the effect lighting device 16).

  Furthermore, in FIGS. 88 to 93, specific examples in which the throwing kiss notice is performed for the changing icon have been described. However, the throwing kiss notice and the change in the display mode of the icon are similarly applied to the hold icon. Is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the notification of the change in the icon display mode is performed only when the icon shape does not change but the icon color changes, but the display mode also changes when the icon shape changes. It is also possible to notify the change. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize the change in the icon display mode, and to suppress the reduction in the effect due to the change in the icon display mode.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, “power up 20%” is displayed in the change notification image B, but this “20%” portion is based on the display mode before the change and the display mode after the change. It can also be made selectable. Further, based on the display mode before the change and the display mode after the change, the color and size of the change notification image B can be changed instead of the “20%” portion.

  Further, the notification of the change of the icon display mode is not limited to the present embodiment, and can be set as appropriate. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the notification of the change in the icon display mode is performed for the change in the icon display mode performed through the action of throwing kiss by the character C3. For example, it can also be performed for a change in the display mode of the icon suddenly performed when the icon is shifted.

  Further, in this embodiment, the throwing kiss notice is performed based on the prior judgment result, but the jackpot judgment result, the special symbol judgment result, or the special figure variation of the special figure judgment information subject to the throwing kiss notice. It is also possible to perform based on the pattern determination result.

  Further, in this embodiment, the throwing kiss notice is executed at the start of the change display of the effect symbol, but the execution timing of the throwing kiss notice is not limited to this, and is appropriately set according to the effect contents of the changing effect. can do. As other execution timings for throwing kiss notice, pseudo stop or re-variation of pseudo-ream, so-called step-up notice step-up, predetermined cut-in notice, dialogue notice, appearance of character, or super reach It can be set as appropriate for execution of the development effect, when the reach state is established, a predetermined operation effect by the effect accessory device 17, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, one heart is thrown toward one icon in one throwing kiss notice, and a notice is made as to whether or not the display mode changes once for one icon. However, with a single throwing kiss notice, multiple hearts will be blown toward one icon at the same time or at predetermined time intervals, and a notice will be given as to whether the display mode will change multiple times for one icon. May be performed. In this case, every time the icon display mode changes, it is also possible to notify the change of the icon display mode, and in response to one throwing kiss notice (after the last heart is skipped). ) It is also possible to collectively notify the change of the icon display mode once.

  Furthermore, it is also possible to make a notice as to whether or not the display mode changes for a plurality of icons by skipping a heart toward a plurality of icons in one throwing kiss notice. In this case, it is also possible to perform notification of changes in the icon display mode for all icons whose display mode has changed, and icon display modes for some icons whose display mode has changed. It is also possible to notify the change.

(Pre-reading zone production, zone production production and zone sign production)
Next, the pre-read zone effect, the zone turn effect, and the zone precursor effect will be described. The pre-reading zone effect is a notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation of winning a big win over one or more variable effects, and the zone hit effect is a notice effect that tells whether or not the look-ahead zone effect is executed, The special symbol is used in the variation display and stop display of the effect symbol. The zone precursor effect is a notice effect for suggesting or notifying execution of the pre-read zone effect, and is performed by displaying an icon in a pre-read zone effect notifying mode or a pre-read zone effect suggesting mode. In this embodiment, the look-ahead zone effect, the zone turn effect, and the zone sign effect are executed in the change effect in the effect mode A, and the look-ahead notice (continuous) performed based on the pre-determination result indicated by the start opening prize designation command Is a kind of notice effect). First, an overview of the pre-read zone effect, the zone turn effect, and the zone precursor effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73 (a-1), when the zone-successful success effect is executed in the effect symbol variation display (variation effect), the next effect symbol variation display is started. The pre-read zone production starts. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 73 (a-2), when the zone-turning failure effect is executed in the effect symbol variation display (variation effect), the pre-read zone from the start of the next effect symbol variation display. Production is not executed.

  Here, when the zone-turning success effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 73 (b-1), when the effect symbol variation display is performed, the “look ahead” symbol is first stopped as the left symbol. Next, when the “zone” symbol is stopped as the right symbol, execution of the pre-reading zone effect is suggested, and finally, the “rush” symbol is stopped as the middle symbol. As described above, when all the special symbols (“prefetch” symbol, “zone” symbol, and “stop” symbol) set in advance are stopped, the “special symbol alignment” is performed, and the prefetch zone effect is executed. Informed.

  On the other hand, when the zone turning failure effect 1 is executed as the zone turning failure effect, as shown in FIG. The “read-ahead” symbol stops, then the “zone” symbol stops as the right symbol, and the “entry” symbol stops as the middle symbol at the end. The normal effect symbol determined by the normal effect symbol stop display pattern determination in step S1309-3 stops as the middle symbol. As described above, when only a part of the special symbols set in advance is stopped, “special symbols are not aligned”, and it is notified that the prefetch zone effect is not executed.

  In addition, when a special symbol appears as a zone turning effect, the normal effect symbol that has been displayed so far is displayed, for example, in the upper left portion of the display unit 140. At this time, the effect design is reduced. For example, when a special symbol appears while a normal effect symbol is displayed in a variably displayed manner, the reduced normal effect symbol is variably displayed in the upper left portion of the display unit 140 along with the appearance. Then, when the variable display is finished and special symbol alignment or special symbol irregularity is performed, the same stop time as that in a normal case (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment) is displayed at the upper left portion of the display unit 140. The reduced normal effect symbol (the effect symbol indicating the loss) is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when the special symbol alignment or special symbol irregularity is finished and a new variable display is started, the special symbol is deleted and the normal production symbol is returned to the original size in the display unit 140. The display moves to the normal position, and the variation display of the effect design is performed as usual.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 (c-1) and 73 (c-2), a change in size of the changing icon performed in accordance with the zone turning effect will be described. In the present embodiment, the size of the changing icon increases in accordance with the stoppage of the special symbol performed as the zone turning effect.

  In the zone production success production, the size of the changing icon is increased by one step according to the stop of the “look ahead” symbol, and the size of the changing icon is further increased by one step according to the stop of the “zone” symbol. As the “rush” symbol stops, the size of the changing icon is further increased by one level to become the third level. When the zone-turning success effect is finished and the pre-reading zone effect is executed, the changing icon is maintained at the third size.

  On the other hand, in zone turning failure production 1, the size of the changing icon increases by one step according to the stop of the “look ahead” symbol, and the size of the changing icon increases by one step according to the stop of the “zone” symbol. In the second stage, the size of the changing icon returns to the original normal size due to the slip of the “rush” symbol.

  In this way, by gradually increasing the size of the changing icon that is easily noticed by the player, a sense of expectation for the pre-reading zone effect can be enhanced.

  Next, specific examples of the prefetch zone effect, the zone sign effect, and the zone turn effect will be described. Here, when the number of the first special figure hold is “2”, a game ball enters the first start port 6 and a new first special figure hold is generated, and the first special figure hold is generated. Accordingly, the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and in the start opening winning time process, the lookahead zone effect scenario “6” shown in FIG. 55 and the precursor effect scenario “14−” shown in FIG. 3 ”and an icon display mode scenario“ 8 ”shown in FIG. 58 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 94A, when the normal hold icons A40 to A42 are displayed on the first display portion 141a to the third display portion 141b of the first hold icon display area 141, an effect that indicates a loss is displayed. When the symbol stop display is performed, the changing icon displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), at the start timing of the variable symbol display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A40, the hold icons A40 to A42 are changed to the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, While shifting to the 2nd display part 141b, the change display of an effect design is started. Since the hold icon A40 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A40 changes to the changing icon A40.

  Then, when the variation display of the effect symbol (variation effect) is being executed, a game ball enters the first start port 6, and a first special figure hold is newly generated, and the first special figure hold In response to the occurrence of the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102. In the start opening winning time process, the pre-read zone effect scenario “6” shown in FIG. 55 and the prelude effect scenario “14−” shown in FIG. 3 ”is selected.

  In this case, first, as shown in FIG. 94 (c), the hold icon A43 corresponding to the newly generated first special figure hold is displayed in the third special mode 41 and shown in FIG. 74 (d). As described above, the hold icons A41 and A42 and the changing icon A40 corresponding to the preceding hold for the newly generated first special figure hold change to the third special mode 41 (corresponding to the hold icon change notice).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (a), when the change display of the effect symbol started in FIG. 94 (b) is stopped and displayed with the effect symbol indicating the loss, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), The changing icon A40 is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (c), when the change display of the effect symbol corresponding to the hold icon A41 is started, the hold icons A41 to A43 are changed to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit, respectively. The display mode of the icon A43, which is the execution target of the pre-read zone effect, is changed to the third special mode 21 (pre-read zone effect suggestion mode 2) and the pre-read zone effect is not executed. The display modes of the icons A41 and A42 are changed to the third special mode 51 (prefetch zone effect suggesting mode 2). Since the hold icon A41 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A41 changes to the changing icon A41.

  Here, when a game ball enters the first starting port 6, since the icon is already displayed in the pre-read zone effect suggestion mode 2, as shown in FIG. 95 (c), the hold icon ( The zone effect non-target icon) A44 is displayed on the third display unit 141c in the same pre-read zone effect suggesting mode 2.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (a), the change display of the effect design corresponding to the changing icon A42 is the effect design immediately before the change display of the effect design corresponding to the icon A43 which is the zone effect target icon. Since it is a variable display, the zone turning effect is executed during the variable display of the effect symbol.

  Here, since the zone-rolling effect is determined to be a zone-rolling success effect, as shown in FIGS. 96 (a) to 96 (c), as the zone-rolling effect, a “look ahead” symbol, a “zone” symbol, In addition, it is notified that the “rushing” symbols are temporarily stopped in order and the pre-read zone effect is executed. Here, the size of the changing icon A42 gradually increases in accordance with the stop of the “look ahead” symbol, the stop of the “zone” symbol, and the stop of the “rush” symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (a), when the change display of the effect symbols started in FIG. 95 (c) is completely stopped and displayed with the special symbols aligned, the changing icon A41 is deleted. The It should be noted that the normal effect design may be sequentially stopped and displayed in a state of being reduced to a position near the end of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 in correspondence with the stop display of each of the three special symbols. In some cases, it will be a combination of effects that will cause a loss.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), when the change display of the effect symbol corresponding to the hold icon A42 is started, a prefetch zone background image HK indicating the prefetch zone is displayed, and the BGM and illumination mode are displayed. Is switched from the effect mode A to the one dedicated to the prefetch zone effect, and the prefetch zone effect (corresponding to the continuous notice effect) is started. In other words, the hold icon change notice and the continuous notice effect are shifted from the start time, but the execution time is overlapped.

  In addition, each of the hold icons A42 to A44 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, and the second display unit 141b. Here, since the hold icon A42 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A42 changes to the changing icon A42.

  Furthermore, the display mode of the hold icon A43, which is the execution target of the prefetch zone effect, is changed to the third special mode 31 (prefetch zone effect notification mode), and the changing icon A42 and the hold icon A44, which are not executed for the prefetch zone effect, are displayed. Changes to the third special mode 61 (prefetch zone effect notification mode). The size of the changing icon A42 is the same as that in the third stage.

  Here, when a game ball enters the first start opening 6, since the icon is already displayed in the pre-read zone effect notification mode, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), the hold icon (zone The production non-target icon) A45 is displayed on the third display unit 141c in the same prefetch zone production notification mode 6.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 97 (c), when the change display of the effect symbol started in FIG. 97 (b) is stopped and displayed with the effect symbol indicating the loss, it is displayed in the changing icon display area 142. The changing icon A42 of the third special mode 31 is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), when the change display (change effect) of the effect symbol corresponding to the hold icon A43 related to the start opening winning designation command that has generated the prefetch zone effect is started, the hold icon Each of A43 to A45 shifts to the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, and the second display unit 141b, and the prefetch zone effect continues. Since the hold icon A43 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A43 is changed to the changing icon A43.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the reach state is established in the variation display of the effect symbol, the display mode of the changing icon A43 is changed to the third special mode 33, and the color of the main silhouette portion is red. And pre-reading zone production continues.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (a), when a predetermined super reach effect (for example, SP reach) is developed, the hold icons A44 and A45 that have been displayed until that time are hidden, and the changing icon A43 is displayed. Changes to the third special mode 34, the color of the main silhouette portion becomes a zebra pattern, and the pre-read zone effect ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), when the stoppage display of the design symbol indicating the jackpot winning (a set of “7”) is performed, the silhouettes of the seven people related to the changing icon A43 are notified of the jackpot winning notification. As an action, raise your hands and express your joy.

  As described above, when the prefetch zone effect is executed, before the prefetch zone effect is executed, the zone sign effect that suggests the execution of the prefetch zone effect is made by changing the icon display mode to the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode. Is done. Here, in the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode, the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 1 (the third special mode 1, the third special mode 4) and the expectation for the execution of the prefetch zone effect are higher than the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 1. A pre-read zone effect suggesting mode 2 (third special mode 2 and third special mode 5) is provided. In the following description, the zone precursor effect according to the pre-read zone effect suggestion mode 1 is referred to as “zone precursor effect 1”, and the zone precursor effect according to the pre-read zone effect suggestion mode 2 is referred to as “zone precursor effect 2”.

  The pre-read zone effect suggestion mode 1 is a dedicated icon display mode for the zone sign effect 1, and the letter “? Zone?” Is added as the icon display mode, and the number of people silhouettes is three. In addition, the pre-read zone effect suggestion mode 2 is also a dedicated icon display mode for the zone sign effect 2, and the letter “Δ zone Δ” is added as the icon display mode, and the number of people silhouettes is composed of five people. Yes. Therefore, the player suggests that the prefetch zone effect is executed by looking at the icons (the hold icon and the changing icon) displayed in the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 1 or the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 2. Since it is possible to easily recognize that the sign effect is being executed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in effect.

  When the pre-reading zone is being executed, the display mode of the icon is changed to the pre-reading zone effect informing mode (third special mode 3 and third special mode 6) to notify that the pre-reading zone effect is being executed. A zone notification effect is performed.

  The pre-read zone effect informing mode is an icon display mode dedicated to the zone informing effect, and the letter “○ zone ○” is added as the icon display mode, and the number of people silhouettes is composed of seven people. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the zone notification effect is being executed by looking at the icons (the hold icon and the changing icon) displayed in the pre-read zone effect notification mode. Decrease in effect can be prevented.

  In addition, zone sign effects 1 and 2 and zone notification effects are provided as effects indicating the pre-read zone execution expectation, and the pre-read zone execution expectation indicated by each effect is the zone sign effect 1 <zone sign effect 2 <zone. It is a notice production. Since the icon display mode related to the zone sign effect 1, the icon display mode related to the zone sign effect 2, and the icon display mode related to the zone notification effect are different from each other, the player can easily set the prefetch zone execution expectation degree. Can be recognized.

  In the present embodiment, there is one kind of prefetch zone effect, but it is also possible to provide a plurality of types of prefetch zone effects that have different jackpot winning expectations. In this case, a first look-ahead zone effect and a second look-ahead zone effect that has a higher win-winning expectation than the first look-ahead zone effect are provided, and the second look-ahead zone effect passes through the first look-ahead zone effect. Thus, there may be a case where the first prefetch zone effect is executed in an expansive manner and a case where the first prefetch zone effect is executed without going through the first prefetch zone effect. The type of the pre-read zone effect to be executed can be suggested by the type of the zone sign effect.

  The icons according to the third special aspect are the same regardless of the type of the shape of the main silhouette portion, but the color of the main silhouette portion differs depending on the type, and the jackpot winning expectation differs depending on the color. In addition, the icons related to the third special mode differ depending on the type of characters attached to the number of people in the sub-silhouette part (“? Zone?”, “△ Zone △”, “○ Zone ○”). The icons according to the third special mode have different look-ahead execution expectation levels depending on the number of people in the sub-silhouette portion and the attached characters.

  Therefore, when the pre-read zone suggestion effect and the pre-read zone notification effect are being executed, if the player pays attention to the display mode of the icon, the player can recognize not only the pre-read zone execution expectation but also the big win winning expectation. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the elements constituting the third special modes 1 to 6 indicate the prefetch execution expectation degree and the jackpot winning expectation degree, but the suggested contents are not limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. it can. For example, the degree of expectation that a specific effect such as SP reach, SPSP reach, or pseudo-ream will be executed depending on the elements constituting the third special modes 1 to 6, and specific types of jackpots such as probability variation jackpots and long hits are executed. It can also be used to suggest expected expectations. Furthermore, the prefetching execution expectation degree and the jackpot winning expectation degree are suggested or notified by the display mode of the icon, but these suggestions or notifications are not the display mode of the icon, for example, the display mode of the effect design or the effect for the effect It can also be performed by other specific effects such as the operating mode of the movable portion 17A of the device 17. In addition, although the zone sign effect is performed on the icon, it can also be performed using other images such as a background image and effect symbols displayed on the display unit 140. Further, the zone sign effect can be performed not by the image display device 14 but by using other effect devices such as the audio output device 15, the effect lighting device 16, and the effect accessory device 17.

  Further, the number of contents to be suggested is not limited to the embodiment depending on the elements constituting the icon display mode, and can be set as appropriate. In addition, the icon shape, size, operation mode, and the like can be appropriately set as elements constituting the icon display mode that suggests a predetermined matter.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the pre-read zone effect, the zone precursor effect, and the zone notification effect are performed based on the prior determination result, but the special figure determination that is the target of the pre-read zone effect, the zone precursor effect, and the zone notification effect. It is also possible to perform based on information jackpot determination result, special symbol determination result, or special symbol fluctuation pattern determination result.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the pre-read zone effect is executed at the start of the variation display of the effect symbol, and the zone precursor effect and the zone notification effect are executed at the time of winning or holding shift, the execution timing of these effects is However, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate according to the contents of the effect of the fluctuation effect. Other execution timings of these effects include, for example, pseudo stop or re-variation of pseudo-ream, so-called step-up notice step-up, predetermined cut-in notice, dialogue notice, character appearance, or super reach It is possible to appropriately set a predetermined operation effect or the like by the effect accessory device 17 when executing the development effect to be performed, when the reach state is established, or the like.

  ◇ Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101, a description will be given of a state in which a variation effect corresponding to a hold icon (previous hold) preceding a hold icon that is an execution target of a prefetch zone effect (continuous notice effect) is not executed due to a command abnormality I will explain. FIGS. 100 (a) and 101 (a) are diagrams showing the same scenes as FIGS. 97 (a) and 98 (a), respectively, but the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The difference is that a symbol display device 20 is added.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (a), the variation display of the first special symbol executed in the first special symbol display device 20 is stopped, and the variation display of the effect symbol started in FIG. 95 (c) is a special symbol. When the icons are completely stopped and displayed in the state, the changing icon A41 displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), when it comes to the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A42, the first special symbol display device 20 starts the variable display of the first special symbol and holds the hold. The icons A42 to A44 are shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, and the second display unit 141b, respectively. Here, since the hold icon A42 shifts to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A42 changes to the changing icon A42.

  However, since the processing in steps S1309-3 to S1312 described above is not executed due to the occurrence of a command abnormality, the pre-read zone effect is not performed without executing the change effect corresponding to the changing icon A42 (effect display change display). (Corresponding to the first pre-reading effect) is not executed (if the pre-reading zone effect has already been started, it is interrupted). Therefore, the special symbols (“prefetch” symbol, “zone” symbol, and “stop” symbol) are kept in a stopped state, the prefetch zone background image HK is not displayed, and the BGM and lighting mode are also displayed. The production mode A is maintained.

  However, even if the variation effect corresponding to the changing icon A42 (the variation display of the effect symbol) or the prefetch zone effect is not executed, the hold icon change notice (corresponding to the second prefetch effect) is executed, so the shift is performed. Accordingly, the display mode of the hold icon A43, which is the execution target of the prefetch zone effect, changes to the third special mode 31 (prefetch zone effect notification mode), and the display mode of the changing icon A42 and the hold icon A44 is the third special mode. It changes to 61 (prefetch zone production | presentation alerting | reporting aspect). The size of the changing icon A42 is the same as that in the third stage.

  Here, when a game ball enters the first start opening 6, since the already displayed icon is displayed in the pre-read zone effect notification mode, as shown in FIG. The hold icon (zone effect non-target icon) A45 is displayed on the third display unit 141c in the same prefetch zone effect notification mode 6.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (c), when the variable display of the first special symbol executed on the first special symbol display device 20 is stopped, the third special symbol displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is displayed. The changing icon A42 of the aspect 31 is deleted. Note that the special symbols are maintained and stopped for a period in which the fluctuating effects are not executed. However, the display is replaced with a normal effect symbol combination (for example, a lost combination). May be.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), the start timing of the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A43 related to the start opening prize designation command that becomes a factor (trigger) determined to execute the prefetch zone effect. Then, the first special symbol display device 20 starts the variable display of the first special symbol and also starts the variable symbol display (variable effect) of the effect symbol. Further, by executing the fluctuating effect, a pre-read zone background image HK indicating that it is a pre-read zone is displayed, and the BGM and illumination mode are switched from those in the effect mode A to those dedicated to the pre-read zone effect, From here, the prefetch zone effect is started (restarted when the prefetch zone effect has already been started by the variation effect executed in advance).

  Each of the hold icons A43 to A45 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, and the second display unit 141b. Since the hold icon A43 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A43 is changed to the changing icon A43.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), when the reach state is established in the variation display of the effect symbol, the display mode of the changing icon A43 is changed to the third special mode 33, and the color of the main silhouette portion is red. Thus, the prefetch zone effect by the prefetch zone background images HK and BGM and the illumination mode continues.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (c), when it develops to a predetermined super reach effect (for example, SP reach), the hold icons A44 and A45 that have been displayed until that time are hidden, and the changing icon A43 is displayed. Is changed to the third special mode 34, the color of the main silhouette portion becomes a zebra pattern, the prefetch zone effect by the prefetch zone background images HK and BGM and the illumination mode is finished, and the super reach effect is executed.

  As described above, when the variation effect corresponding to the hold icon related to the execution of the prefetch zone effect (first prefetch effect) is not executed due to the command abnormality, the execution of the prefetch zone effect is not started, or the prefetch zone effect Since the execution is interrupted and the pre-reading zone effect is started or restarted based on the start of the changing effect corresponding to the next hold icon, the relationship between the changing effect and the pre-reading zone effect (continuous notice effect) It is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying the progress of the game and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game (improvement of the interest of the game).

  In addition, it can be avoided that the player feels uncomfortable because only the pre-reading zone effect is executed even though the change effect is not executed, and the game shop and the gaming machine have a distrust. Can be prevented. Note that, even in the case of the above-described other types of continuous notice effects (countdown notice effect, chance eye notice effect, etc.), if the change effect is not executed due to a command abnormality, it is the same as the prefetch zone effect.

  Further, even when the fluctuating effect corresponding to the hold icon is not executed due to a command abnormality, the hold icon is shifted from the first hold icon display area 141 to the changing icon display area 142, and the hold icon change notice (second) Since the pre-reading effect) is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to misunderstand the progress of the game, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game (improvement of the interest of the game).

  In addition, when the variation effect is not executed due to the command abnormality, information indicating that may be displayed on the image display device 14, or when the variation effect is not executed, a dedicated background image is displayed. Alternatively, information indicating that the continuous notice effect is not executed or is interrupted may be displayed on the image display device 14.

  In addition, when the continuous notice effect is constituted by a main effect in a predetermined mode and a sub effect including a count display of the number of consecutive times, the main effect is not executed during a period in which the variable effect is not executed due to a command abnormality. An effect may be executed. Even in this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to misunderstand the progress of the game.

  Furthermore, when the variation effect is not executed due to the command abnormality, whether to execute the continuous notice effect depending on whether the result of the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the variation effect is a big hit is determined. For example, the continuous notice effect may be executed (not interrupted) when the jackpot is won, but may not be executed (interrupted) when the jackpot is not won.

  In addition, when a continuous notice effect is interrupted due to the occurrence of a command abnormality and is resumed by execution of the next variable effect, the variable effect is provided as the content (aspect) of the continuous notice effect after the restart. Production contents (modes) that should have been executed while is not executed may be executed, or may be executed from the first production contents (modes) of the continuous notice production. If it does in this way, it will become difficult to recognize that the continuous notice effect was interrupted, and it will become difficult for a player to have discomfort and distrust.

  In addition, when the variation effect is not executed due to a command abnormality, the size of the held icon and / or the changing icon is changed so as to be enlarged as compared with the normal size. The size of the held icon and / or the changing icon may be restored to the original size. In this way, the on-hold icon change notice can be emphasized, and the entertainment of the game is improved.

  Further, when the variation effect is not executed due to a command abnormality, the hold icon and / or the changing icon is moved from the lower part of the display unit 140 to the center or a position near the center, and then the variation effect is executed. In addition, the hold icon and / or the changing icon that have been moved and displayed may be returned to their original positions. In this way, the on-hold icon change notice can be emphasized, and the entertainment of the game is improved.

(Ordinary production)
Next, a general drawing effect (roulette effect) will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, the general map effect (roulette effect) is executed when a general map change pattern designation command is transmitted based on the normal map change pattern determination. In other words, the ordinary symbol effect is an effect that is executed during the normal symbol fluctuation display, and is 5 after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the normal symbol fluctuation display was started (normal symbol determination was executed). .5 seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (a), in the ordinary drawing effect, a predetermined character Y first appears in the box B, and suggests the start of the ordinary drawing effect that “If the dumpling mark stops, the dumpling chance time is reached”. ) Is displayed (display effect), and as shown in FIG. 103 (b), the character Y is sucked into the box B, the front of the box B opens, the reel L appears, and rotation from the top to the bottom starts. (Timing at T1, T7, and T16 in FIG. 102).

  On the surface of the reel L, one or more of four types of special effect designs of “×” symbol, “Dango” symbol, “Intense heat” symbol, and “?” Symbol are attached. Thus, the reel arrangement shown in the remarks column of FIG. 70 (b) is selected in accordance with the usual figure variation pattern (ordinary figure effect control command) determined by the ordinary figure effect pattern determination in step S1417.

  104 (a) and 104 (b), as the reel L rotates, the special effect symbols are scrolled from the top to the bottom on the front surface of the box B, thereby changing the special effect symbols. Display (roulette effect) is performed. This special effect design variation display is performed for 5.0 seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, when the special effect design variation display is completed, the predetermined special effect design is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the rotation of the reel L is stopped, and any one of the “x” symbol, the “dumpling” symbol, the “hot” symbol, and the “?” Symbol is stopped and displayed on the front of the box B so as to be visible. The result of the ordinary drawing effect (normal symbol determination) is notified.

  Here, the symbol “x” indicates that the result of the normal symbol determination is lost or hit 1 (notification), and the symbol “dango” indicates that the result of the normal symbol determination is 2 (notification). The “Intense heat” symbol suggests (informs) the expectation that the change display (variation effect) of the special symbol being executed will be a big hit, and the “?” Symbol is the result of the normal symbol judgment and the big hit expectation It is suggested that the degree cannot be grasped.

  Then, 0.5 seconds after the stoppage of the special effect design, the box B and the reel L are erased, and the normal design effect (roulette effect) is finished (timing T4, T9, T17 in FIG. 102).

  Here, the ordinary drawing effect (roulette effect) started at the timing of T2 in FIG. 102 is executed based on the result that the normal symbol determination result is 1 and therefore, as a result of the ordinary drawing effect. The “x” symbol or the “?” Symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, it can be said that this ordinary drawing effect is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the second auxiliary game is generated based on the normal symbol determination based on the result of the variation display of the special effect symbol.

  In addition, the ordinary drawing effect (roulette effect) started at the timing of T7 in FIG. 102 is executed based on the result that the normal symbol determination result is 2, so that the result of the ordinary drawing effect is “ The “Dango” symbol will be stopped. That is, it can be said that this ordinary drawing effect is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the second auxiliary game is generated based on the normal symbol determination based on the result of the variation display of the special effect symbol.

  In addition, the normal symbol effect (roulette effect) started at the timing of T16 in FIG. 102 is a result of the normal symbol determination being lost, and the special symbol determination of the variation display of the second special symbol started at the timing of T15. Since this is executed based on the fact that the result of (2) is a big hit, the “hot heat” symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the ordinary drawing effect. In other words, it can be said that this ordinary drawing effect is an suggestion effect (a jackpot winning suggestion effect) that suggests the degree of expectation that a jackpot will be generated based on the result of the special effect symbol based on the result of the special symbol determination.

  In this way, in the ordinary drawing effect (roulette effect), a notification effect for notifying whether or not the second auxiliary game is generated based on the normal symbol determination based on the result of the variation display of the special effect symbol, Based on the result of the determination of the jackpot winning suggestion effect, the suggestion effect (the jackpot winning suggestion effect) suggests the expectation degree that the running variation effect (variable display of the special symbol) will generate the jackpot game from the result of the variation display of the special effect symbol Are executed in a similar (similar) manner. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp whether the roulette effect being performed is a notification effect or a suggestion effect, and the player will have a sense of expectation for the occurrence of the second auxiliary game and the occurrence of the jackpot game, The fun of gaming is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect (big win winning suggestion effect) is executed at a timing based on the normal symbol variation display executed independently of the special symbol variation display. It may be executed at a timing independent of the symbol fluctuation display, or may be executed at both a timing based on the normal symbol fluctuation display and a timing independent of the normal symbol fluctuation display. . If it does in this way, it will be possible to prevent the ordinary drawing effect (roulette) effect from becoming monotonous and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the suggestion target of the degree of expectation that the jackpot game is generated by the suggestion effect (the jackpot winning suggestion effect) may be extended to the currently reserved special figure hold, and in this case, the jackpot winning suggestion effect What is necessary is just to determine a prior determination result in an execution determination process. In addition, when expanding the target of the suggestion effect to the special figure hold, the special effect design that can specify which special figure hold is the target is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special effect design. May be.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the execution time of the ordinary drawing effect is 5.5 seconds, but it may be selected from a plurality of types of execution time, or one time over a plurality of variable effects. You may make it perform a usual drawing effect. Also, it is possible to pre-determine the general map hold, and to execute the general map production based on the result of the pre-determination.

  Further, the production mode of the ordinary drawing effect is not limited to the above example, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the variation display and stop display modes of the special effect symbols are not limited to the above example. It is not box B and reel L that a plurality of special effect symbols are attached, but a plurality of special effect symbols are arranged in a horizontal row on a strip-shaped roulette, and arrows and cursors scroll horizontally on the roulette. The display (moving) can be used to display the special effect symbol as a variable display, and the special effect symbol can be displayed as a stop display when the arrow or the cursor stops.

(Long opening production)
Next, the long opening effect will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, the long opening effect is an effect that is executed during the two auxiliary games as a result of the normal symbol determination, and is executed together with the start of the auxiliary game. The long opening effect is a long opening notice that is performed between the start of the first opening of the second starting port 7 and the opening of the second starting port 7 of the second auxiliary game. An effect and an effect during long opening performed while the second start opening 7 is opened for the second time are configured.

  As shown in FIG. 107 (a), in the long opening notice effect, the box B and the character Y appear in a predetermined area of the screen of the image display device 14, and the character Y is “seconds until long opening” and the second start. A display for notifying (notifying) that the mouth 7 is long open is displayed (timing from T10 to T11 in FIG. 102). In the portion of ○, the time (seconds) until the long opening is actually started is counted down to 3 · 2 · 1.

  As shown in FIG. 107 (b), the effect during the long opening is that the character Y displayed in the predetermined area of the screen of the image display device 14 by the execution of the long opening notice effect is “Dango chance time! Is displayed indicating that the second start port 7 is being opened for a long time (timing from T11 to T12 in FIG. 102). Each time a game ball enters the second start port 7, the second hold icon (B00 to B03) is displayed in the second hold icon display area 143.

  In the long opening effect, the long opening effect sound may not be output from the audio output device 15 so as not to disturb the fluctuation effect being executed, and the long opening effect image may be displayed on the image display device 14. The long opening effect image may be displayed while outputting the long opening effect sound. Further, only the long opening effect image may be displayed without outputting the long opening effect sound during the changing effect, and the long opening effect image may be displayed while outputting the long opening effect sound during the customer waiting state. Furthermore, the production time and the production mode of the long opening production are not limited to those described above, and can be set as appropriate.

  Next, a state where the fluctuation effect corresponding to the hold icon is not executed due to the command abnormality but the normal drawing effect (roulette effect) is executed will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 108 (a), when the normal hold icons A01 to A03 are displayed on the first display portion 141a to the third display portion 141c of the first hold icon display area 141, the hold icon A00 is displayed. When the effect symbol indicating the loss as a result of the corresponding variation effect is stopped, the changing icon A00 displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is deleted. At this time, the first special symbol display device 20 stops and displays the first special symbol when it is lost.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), at the start timing of the variable symbol display of the special symbol corresponding to the first hold icon A01, the first special symbol display device 20 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. The hold icons A01 to A03 are shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, and the second display unit 141b, respectively. Here, since the hold icon A01 shifts to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A01 changes to the changing icon A01.

  However, since the processing in steps S1309-3 to S1312 described above is not executed due to the occurrence of a command abnormality, the changing effect corresponding to the changing icon A01 (the changing display of the effect symbol) and the changing icon change notice are executed. The changing icon A01 remains in the normal mode.

  Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the winning gate 10 and is determined to be 1 in the normal symbol determination and is determined to be the normal symbol variation pattern 1 in the normal symbol variation pattern determination, the normal symbol display device 22 displays the variation of the normal symbol. Is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (a), when the normal symbol effect display timing is reached after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the normal symbol change display, the vicinity of the changing icon display region 142 (stop display). Box B and character Y appear between the design symbol and the second hold icon display area 143), which indicate (inform) that the start of the regular diagram production is “the dumpling chance time if the dumpling mark stops” Display effect).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), the character Y is sucked into the box B, the front surface of the box B is opened, the reel L appears, and rotation from the top to the bottom is started. At this time, the first special symbol display device 20 continues the variable display of the first special symbol.

  In addition, this time, the regular drawing effect is executed during the variable display period of the first special symbol, but since the variable effect is not executed due to the command abnormality, the expected degree of occurrence of the jackpot is displayed as the variable effect display of the special effect symbol. It is not a suggestion effect (a jackpot winning suggestion effect) based on the result of, but a notification effect for notifying whether or not the second auxiliary game occurs (occurs) based on the result of the variation display of the special effect symbol. .

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 109 (b) and FIG. 110 (a), a reel arrangement in which three types of special effect symbols of “x” symbol, “dumpling” symbol, and “?” Symbol are attached to the surface of the reel L. Thus, the reel arrangement is not provided with the “super heat” symbol on the surface of the reel L that suggests (notifies) the expectation that the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol is a big hit.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (b), the “?” Symbol that suggests (notifies) that the result of the normal symbol determination or the expected degree of jackpot cannot be grasped is stopped so that it can be visually recognized by the player. Displayed and the result of the usual drawing effect is notified. Then, the box B and the reel L are erased 0.5 seconds after the stop display of the “?” Symbol, and the ordinary drawing effect (roulette effect) ends. At this time, the first special symbol display device 20 continues the variable display of the first special symbol.

  In this way, when the variation effect is not executed due to the occurrence of the command abnormality, the expectation that the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol will be a big hit as the ordinary drawing effect pattern of the ordinary drawing effect (roulette effect) ( The notice pattern to be notified (for example, the “hot heat” design) is selected as a normal drawing effect pattern that is not included in the reel, and the jackpot winning suggestion effect is not executed in the normal drawing effect (roulette effect).

  Therefore, despite the fact that the fluctuating effect is not executed, the notice symbol that suggests (notifies) the expected degree that the special symbol fluctuating display (fluctuating effect) is a big hit in the reel arrangement in the ordinary drawing effect (roulette effect) is arranged By doing so, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player who visually recognizes the game is awakened, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

  In addition, when the variation effect is not executed due to the occurrence of the command abnormality, the normal drawing effect may be executed in a special mode different from the normal mode. For example, the display related to the normal drawing effect is expanded more than usual. Alternatively, the image may be executed by changing the color or shape of the image from a normal one or by moving the image to a position closer to the center of the display unit 140. Further, when the next variation effect is executed during the execution of the ordinary drawing effect in the special mode, the normal mode may be restored or the special mode may be maintained. If it does in this way, the usual drawing effect performed in the period when the variation effect is not performed can be emphasized, and the interest of a game will improve. Further, the ordinary drawing effect (roulette effect) itself may not be executed.

(Second Embodiment)
The second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

  In the first embodiment, even if the fluctuating effect or the changing icon change notice is not executed due to a command abnormality, the display of the hold icon and the changing icon in a special mode is permitted (continued), whereas The second embodiment is different in that the display of the hold icon and the changing icon in a special mode is restricted (suspended or stopped) when the changing effect or the changing icon changing notice is not executed due to the command abnormality. That is, the hold icon change notice (pre-read notice effect) is not executed during the period when the change effect is not executed.

  In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the control method other than the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command analysis process shown in FIG. 42 is the same, and therefore, the special figure fluctuation in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Only the pattern specifying command analysis process will be described, and the other description will be omitted.

  Further, in the special figure variation pattern designation command analysis process of FIG. 42 and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command analysis process of FIG. 111, step S1309-1-15-1 is added after step S1309-1-15. However, since only step S1309-1-16-1 is added after step S1309-1-16, the same processing is given the same step number and description thereof is omitted.

  In step S1309-1-15-1, the sub CPU 102a sets an icon effect allowance control command indicating that display of the hold icon and the changing icon in a special mode is allowed in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The figure variation pattern designation command analysis process is terminated.

  The set icon presentation allowance control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700. When the image control board 105 receives the icon effect allowance control command, the image control board 105 changes the icon display mode to any one of the special modes in response to the reception of the icon effect control command or the icon change control command, and the changing icon. Performs processing to execute change notice.

  In step S1309-1-16-1, the sub CPU 102a sets an icon effect restriction control command indicating that display of the special mode of the held icon and the changing icon is restricted in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The figure variation pattern designation command analysis process is terminated.

  The set icon effect regulation control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700. When the image control board 105 receives the icon effect control command, the image control board 105 changes the icon display mode to one of the special modes in response to the reception of the icon effect control command and the icon change control command, and the changing icon Performs processing to execute change notice.

  Next, in the second embodiment, with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113, the variation effect corresponding to the hold icon (previous hold) prior to the hold icon that is the target of the throwing kiss notice is not executed due to the command abnormality. explain. 112 (a) and 113 (a) are diagrams showing the same scenes (scenes) as in FIGS. 88 (a) and 89 (a), respectively, but the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. The difference is that a first special symbol display device 20 is added.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), the normal mode hold icon A21 is displayed on the first display unit 141a of the first hold icon display area 141, and the normal mode hold icon A20 is displayed in the changing icon display area 142. It is assumed that a change display (change effect) of the effect symbol is performed when displayed. At this time, the first special symbol display device 20 performs the variable display of the first special symbol.

  Then, a game ball enters the first start port 6 and a new first special figure hold is generated, and a first start port winning designation command is generated according to the occurrence of the first special figure hold. It is determined that the throwing kiss notice is determined to be executed in the start winning process, and the throwing kiss notice is determined as the scenario 93.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), the hold icon A22 corresponding to the newly generated first special figure hold is displayed in the normal mode, and then the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed. As a result, the changing icon A20 displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is deleted. At this time, the first special symbol display device 20 stops and displays the first special symbol when it is lost.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (c), when it comes to the start of the variable symbol display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A21, the first special symbol display device 20 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, The icons A21 and A22 are shifted to shift to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 141a, respectively. Here, since the hold icon A21 shifts to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A21 changes to the changing icon A21.

  However, since the processing in steps S1309-3 to S1312 described above is not executed due to the occurrence of a command abnormality, the changing effect corresponding to the changing icon A21 (the changing display of the design symbol) or the changing icon change notice (throwing) Kiss notice, handshake meeting notice, etc.) are not executed, and the display of the hold icon and the changing icon in a special mode is restricted by executing the process of step S1309-1-16-1 described above. Is done. Therefore, originally, the hold icon A22 should be displayed in the normal mode although the display mode should change to the second special mode 13 (red) with the shift to the first display unit 141a. (The hold icon change notice will be interrupted).

  Then, a game ball enters the first start port 6 and a new first special figure hold is generated, and a first start port winning designation command is generated according to the occurrence of the first special figure hold. Suppose that it is determined that the throwing kiss notice is not executed in the start winning process.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 113 (a), the hold icon A23 corresponding to the newly generated first special figure hold is displayed in the normal mode, and thereafter, the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed. In addition, the changing icon A21 is deleted. At this time, the first special symbol display device 20 stops and displays the first special symbol when it is lost.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), at the start timing of the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A22 subject to the throwing kiss notice, the first special symbol display device 20 displays the first special symbol. While the variable display is started, the variable symbol display is started, and the hold icons A22 to A23 are shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 141a, respectively. Here, since the hold icon A22 shifts to the changing icon display area, the hold icon A22 changes to the changing icon A22.

  Here, since the process of step S1309-3 to step S1312 described above is executed when the command abnormality does not occur, the changing effect corresponding to the changing icon A22 (changed display of the effect symbol) and the changing icon change notice in advance. Will be executed, and the hold icon and the changing icon are allowed to be displayed in a special mode.

  Therefore, the display state of the changing icon A22 is changed from the second special mode 13 (red) to the second special mode 14 (zebra pattern) with the shift from the hold icon A22 (the hold change notice is resumed). The character C3 related to the throwing kiss notice appears and the changing icon change notice is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (c), the character C3 performs a throwing kiss to fly the heart HT toward a predetermined icon. Since the subsequent steps are the same as those in FIG. 90, the description thereof is omitted here.

  In this way, even when the fluctuating effect corresponding to the hold icon (previous hold) before the hold icon that is the target of the changing icon change notice (throwing kiss notice) is not executed due to a command abnormality, the hold icon Is shifted from the first hold icon display area 141 to the changing icon display area 142, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to misunderstand the progress of the game.

  In addition, since the display in the special mode of the icon is restricted when the change effect is not executed due to the command abnormality, the player is only allowed to execute the hold icon change notice even though the change effect is not executed. A sense of incongruity can be avoided, and the distrust of the game store and the gaming machine can be avoided. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unnecessary misunderstanding that the game progresses differently from the usual and leads to high or low expectations for the jackpot.

  Next, in the second embodiment, a state in which the fluctuating effect corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the throwing kiss notice is not executed due to the command abnormality will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 (a) is a diagram showing the same scene (scene) as FIG. 89 (a), except that a first special symbol display device 20 for performing variable display of the first special symbol is added. Is different.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 114 (a), the hold icon A22 of the second special mode 13 (red) is displayed on the first display unit 141a of the first hold icon display area 141, and the normal mode is displayed on the second display unit 141b. When the suspension icon A23 is displayed and then the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed, the changing icon A21 displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is deleted. At this time, in the first special symbol display device 20, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), at the start timing of the variable symbol display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A22, the first special symbol display device 20 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. The icons A22 and A23 are shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 141a, respectively. Here, since the hold icon A22 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the holding icon A22 changes to the changing icon A22.

  However, since the processing in steps S1309-3 to S1312 described above is not executed due to the occurrence of a command abnormality, the changing effect corresponding to the changing icon A22 (the changing display of the design symbol) or the changing icon change notice (here) Then, the throwing kiss notice is not executed (execution is restricted), and the display of the hold icon and the changing icon in a special mode is restricted by the processing of step S1309-1-16-1.

  Therefore, originally, the hold icon A22 should be changed to the second special mode 14 (zebra pattern) with the shift to the changing icon display area 142, but returned to the normal mode ( The character C3 related to the throwing kiss notice does not appear.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (c), the first special symbol display device 20 continues to display the variation of the first special symbol, but since the execution of the throwing kiss notice is restricted, the character An effect in which C performs a throwing kiss to fly the heart HT toward a predetermined icon (here, a changing icon) or an effect in which the display mode of the icon hit by the heart HT is not performed. Although the throwing kiss notice is described here, the handshake meeting notice is the same as the throwing kiss notice.

  As described above, even if the fluctuating effect corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the changing icon change notice (throwing kiss notice) is not executed due to a command abnormality, the hold icon changes from the first hold icon display area 141. Since the shift to the middle icon display area 142 and the change to the second display mode 14 are performed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to misunderstand the progress of the game.

  In addition, since the display in the special mode of the icon is restricted when the change effect is not executed due to the command abnormality, the player is only allowed to execute the hold icon change notice even though the change effect is not executed. A sense of incongruity can be avoided, and the distrust of the game store and the gaming machine can be avoided. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unnecessary misunderstanding that the game progresses differently from the usual and leads to high or low expectations for the jackpot.

  In addition, when the changing effect corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the changing icon change notice (throwing kiss notice) is not executed due to a command abnormality, the changing icon change notice is not executed, so the changing effect is not executed. However, it is possible to avoid the player from feeling uncomfortable by executing only the icon change notice (throwing kiss notice) during the change, and the game shop and the gaming machine will not be distrusted. .

  In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, when the change effect corresponding to the hold icon is not executed due to the command abnormality during the execution of the prefetch zone effect (continuous notice effect), the execution of the prefetch zone effect is interrupted. However, the prefetch zone effect itself may be terminated instead of being interrupted. Even in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to misunderstand the progress of the game, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game (improvement of the interest of the game).

  Next, in the second embodiment, FIG. 115 and FIG. 115 show that the variation effect corresponding to the hold icon (previous hold) preceding the hold icon that is the target of the prefetch zone effect (continuous notice effect) is not executed due to the command abnormality. This will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (a) and 116 (a) are diagrams showing the same scenes (scenes) as in FIGS. 97 (a) and 98 (a), respectively, but the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. The difference is that a first special symbol display device 20 is added.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (a), the variable display of the first special symbol that has been executed by the first special symbol display device 20 is stopped, and the variable symbol display of the effect symbol started in FIG. 95 (c) is a special symbol. When the icons are completely stopped and displayed in the state, the changing icon A41 displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (b), at the start timing of the variable symbol display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A42, the first special symbol display device 20 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, The icons A42 to A44 are shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, and the second display unit 141b, respectively.

  However, since the processing in steps S1309-3 to S1312 described above is not executed due to the occurrence of a command abnormality, the pre-read zone effect is not performed without executing the change effect corresponding to the changing icon A42 (effect display change display). Is not executed (interrupted if the pre-reading zone effect has already been started with the previously executed variation effect). Therefore, the special symbols (“prefetch” symbol, “zone” symbol, and “stop” symbol) are kept in a stopped state, the prefetch zone background image HK is not displayed, and the BGM and lighting mode are also displayed. The production mode A is maintained.

  Moreover, the display of the hold icon and the changing icon in a special mode is restricted by executing the process of step S1309-1-16-1. Therefore, originally, the display mode of the hold icon A43, which is the execution target of the prefetch zone effect, changes to the third special mode 31 (prefetch zone notification mode), and the changing icon A42 which is the non-execution target of the prefetch zone effect. And the display mode of the hold icon A44 should change to the third special mode 61 (prefetch zone effect notification mode), but has returned to the normal mode (changed / returned), and the size of the changing icon A42 is also normal (The hold icon change notice is interrupted.)

  Here, when a game ball enters the first start opening 6, since the display of the hold icon and the changing icon in a special mode is restricted, as shown in FIG. The hold icon (zone effect non-target icon) A45 is displayed on the third display unit 141c in the normal mode.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (c), when the variation display of the first special symbol executed on the first special symbol display device 20 is stopped, the normal mode displayed in the varying icon display region 142 is displayed. The changing icon A42 is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (a), the first special symbol display device 20 uses the first special symbol at the start timing of the variable symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon A43 that is the execution target of the prefetch zone effect. When the change display of the effect is started and the change display of the effect pattern (change effect) is started, the prefetch zone background image HK indicating the prefetch zone is displayed, and the BGM and the illumination mode are those of the effect mode A. The pre-read zone effect is started by switching to the one dedicated to the pre-read zone effect (resumed when the pre-read zone effect has already been started by the change effect previously executed).

  Further, the hold icons A44 and A45 are shifted to the first display portion 141a and the second display portion 141b, respectively, and the hold icon A43 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142 to become the changing icon A43. Furthermore, the display of the hold icon and the changing icon in a special mode is permitted by executing the process of step S1309-1-15-1. Therefore, the display mode of the hold icon A43, which is the execution target of the prefetch zone effect, is changed to the third special mode 31 (prefetch zone notification mode), and the changing icon A42 and the hold icon A44, which are non-execution targets of the prefetch zone effect, are displayed. The display mode changes to the third special mode 61 (prefetch zone effect notification mode). That is, the hold icon change notice is resumed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), when the reach state is established in the variation display of the effect symbol, the display mode of the changing icon A43 is changed to the third special mode 33, and the color of the main silhouette portion is red. Thus, the prefetch zone effect by the prefetch zone background images HK and BGM and the illumination mode continues.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (c), when a predetermined super reach effect (for example, SP reach) is developed, the hold icons A44 and A45 that have been displayed until that time are hidden, and the changing icon A43 is displayed. Changes to the third special mode 34, the color of the main silhouette portion becomes a zebra pattern, and the pre-read zone effect ends.

  As described above, when the variation effect corresponding to the hold icon related to the execution of the prefetch zone effect (continuous notice effect) is not executed due to the command abnormality, the execution of the prefetch zone effect is not started or the execution of the prefetch zone effect is not performed. Since the pre-reading zone effect is started or resumed based on the start of the changing effect corresponding to the next hold icon, the relationship between the changing effect and the pre-reading zone effect (continuous notice effect) becomes unclear. It is possible to prevent this from happening, making it difficult for the player to misunderstand the progress of the game, and preventing a decrease in the interest of the game (improvement in the interest of the game).

  In addition, it can be avoided that the player feels uncomfortable because only the pre-reading zone effect is executed even though the change effect is not executed, and the game shop and the gaming machine have a distrust. Can be prevented.

  In addition, since the display in the special mode of the icon is restricted when the change effect is not executed due to the command abnormality corresponding to the hold icon, only the hold icon change notice (pre-read notice effect) even though the change effect is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and the game store or the gaming machine will not be distrusted. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unnecessary misunderstanding that the game progresses differently from the usual and leads to high or low expectations for the jackpot.

  In addition, even when the variation effect is not executed due to the command abnormality corresponding to the hold icon, the display in the special mode of the icon is allowed based on the start of the change effect corresponding to the next hold icon. The hold icon change notice that should be executed is executed (restarted) based on the start of the fluctuating effect (reduction of the special figure hold), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◇ (Third embodiment)
The third embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

  In the third embodiment, even when a variation effect is not executed due to a command abnormality, a pre-reading notice effect (continuous notice effect, pending icon change notice) or a changing icon change notice (shake handshake notice, throwing kiss notice) is executed. Is different from the first embodiment and the second embodiment in that is allowed.

  In the first embodiment and the third embodiment, the control method other than the first half of the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 34 is the same, and therefore the first half of the command analysis processing in the third embodiment is described with reference to FIG. Only the portion will be described, and other description will be omitted.

  Also, since only the processing in step S1309-2 is different between the first half of the command analysis processing of FIG. 34 and the first half of the command analysis processing of FIG. 117, the same processing is denoted by the same step number and description thereof is omitted. To do.

  In step S1309-2, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect restriction that is set to ON or OFF depending on the presence / absence of a gaming state designation command, an effect symbol designation command, and a special figure variation pattern designation command (missing, missing bits, command contradiction, etc.). It is determined whether or not the flag is ON (command abnormal), and if it is determined that the effect restriction flag is not ON (command has been received normally), the process proceeds to step S1309-3, and the effect restriction flag is ON. If it is determined that the command has not been received normally, the process proceeds to step S1311.

  Thus, even when there is a command abnormality in which the command cannot be normally received, the prefetch zone effect start determination process in step S1311 and the changing icon change notice determination process in step S1312 are performed. Continuous notice effect, hold icon change notice, and changing icon change notice (handshake meeting notice, throwing kiss notice) will be executed.

  Next, in the third embodiment, a state in which the fluctuating effect corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the throwing kiss notice is not executed due to the command abnormality will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119. 118 (a) and 119 (a) are diagrams showing the same scenes (scenes) as in FIGS. 89 (a) and 90 (a), respectively, but the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. The difference is that a first special symbol display device 20 is added.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), the hold icon A22 of the second special mode 13 (red) is displayed on the first display unit 141a of the first hold icon display area 141, and the normal mode is displayed on the second display unit 141b. When the suspension icon A23 is displayed and then the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed, the changing icon A21 displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is deleted. At this time, in the first special symbol display device 20, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), when the start timing of the variable symbol display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A22 is reached, the first special symbol display device 20 starts the variable display of the first special symbol and holds it. The icons A22 and A23 are shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 141a, respectively. Here, since the hold icon A22 shifts to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A22 is changed to the changing icon A22, and the display form is changed from the second special form 13 (red) to the second special form in accordance with the shift. It changes to aspect 14 (zebra pattern), and the hold icon change notice is executed.

  However, since the processing in steps S1309-3 and S1310 described above is not executed due to the occurrence of a command abnormality, the fluctuating effect corresponding to the fluctuating icon A22 (fluctuation display of effect symbols) is not executed (execution is restricted). A) state. On the other hand, since the processes of step S1311 and step S1312, the character C3 related to the throwing kiss notice appears and the changing icon change notice starts.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (c), the first special symbol display device 20 continues to display the variation of the first special symbol, but maintains the state where the variation effect (the variation display of the effect symbol) is not executed. The character C3 performs a throwing kiss and flies the heart HT toward a predetermined icon. The icon to which the heart HT is skipped is determined by the normal icon display mode scenario indicated by the normal icon display mode scenario data stored in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c. Suppose the heart HT is skipped.

  As shown in FIG. 119 (a), when the heart HT hits the changing icon A22, a predetermined effect is superimposed on the changing icon A22 so that the changing icon A22 is difficult to see or cannot be seen. (Not shown). At this time, the state where the variation effect (the effect symbol variation display) is not executed is maintained.

  Thereafter, when the predetermined effect is deleted, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), the display mode of the changing icon A22 changes from the second special mode 14 (zebra pattern) to the second special mode (rainbow color). At the same time, a change notification image B for notifying that the icon display mode has changed to “power up 100%” is displayed in the vicinity of the changing icon A22 that is the subject of the throwing kiss notice, and the sound output device 15 A sound for notifying a change in the display mode of the icon is output (for example, “power up” is generated by the voice of the character C3), and the lighting device 16 for lighting performs a lighting effect in a mode dedicated to the change. In the present embodiment, the change notification image HG is composed of an image including the text “power up”, but the display mode is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate.

  Then, the character C3 performs an action corresponding to the successful change of the display mode of the changing icon A22 (an action of spreading both hands with a smile in FIG. 119 (b)), and then, as shown in FIG. 119 (c). To be erased. At this time, the state where the variation effect (the effect symbol variation display) is not executed is maintained. Although the throwing kiss notice is described here, the handshake meeting notice is the same as the throwing kiss notice.

  In this way, even when the fluctuating effect corresponding to the hold icon subject to the changing icon change notice (in this case, the throwing kiss notice) is not executed due to a command abnormality, the hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 141. Is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, and the change to the second display mode 14 is made. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to misunderstand the progress of the game.

  In addition, even if the changing effect corresponding to the hold icon that is the subject of the changing icon change notice (in this case, the throwing kiss notice) is not executed due to a command error, the pending icon change notice or the changing icon change notice (throwing kiss notice) Since the notice is executed, it is possible to avoid the player from feeling bored or dissatisfied with the fact that the fluctuating effect is not executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, in the third embodiment, a state in which the changing effect corresponding to the hold icon (previous hold) before the hold icon that is the target of the prefetch zone effect is not executed due to the command abnormality will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 (a) is a diagram showing the same scene as FIG. 97 (c), except that a first special symbol display device 20 for performing variable display of the first special symbol is added. Is different.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (a), the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the first special symbol display device 20 is stopped, and the variable symbol of the effect symbol started in FIG. 95 (c) is displayed as the special symbol. When the icons are completely stopped and displayed in the state, the changing icon A41 displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (b), when it comes to the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A42, the first special symbol display device 20 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, and the prefetching is performed. A pre-read zone background image HK indicating that the zone is displayed is displayed, and when the BGM and the illumination mode are switched from those in the effect mode A to those dedicated to the pre-read zone effect, the pre-read zone effect (continuous notice effect) is started.

  Also, the hold icons A42 to A44 are shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, and the second display unit 141b, respectively. Here, since the hold icon A42 shifts to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A42 changes to the changing icon A42.

  Furthermore, the display mode of the hold icon A43, which is the execution target of the prefetch zone effect, changes to the third special mode 31 (prefetch zone effect notification mode), and the display mode of the changing icon A42 and the hold icon A44 is the third special mode 61. Changing to the (pre-read zone effect notification mode), the changing icon change notice and the pending icon change notice are executed. The size of the changing icon A42 is the same as that in the third stage.

  Here, when a game ball enters the first starting port 6, since the icon is already displayed in the pre-read zone effect notification mode, as shown in FIG. The production non-target icon) A45 is displayed on the third display unit 141c in the same prefetch zone production notification mode 6.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (c), when the change display of the first special symbol executed on the first special symbol display device 20 stops due to the loss, the third icon displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is displayed. The changing icon A42 of the special mode 31 is deleted. Since the subsequent steps are the same as those in FIG. 98, the description thereof is omitted here.

  As described above, even when the fluctuating effect corresponding to the hold icon related to the execution of the prefetch zone effect (continuous notice effect) is not executed due to the command abnormality, the hold icon is changed from the first hold icon display area 141. Since the display area 142 is shifted to the third special mode 31 and the hold icon change notice and the changing icon change notice are executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to misunderstand the progress of the game.

  In addition, even if the variable effect corresponding to the hold icon related to the execution of the pre-read zone effect (continuous notice effect) is not executed due to the command abnormality, the pre-read zone effect is executed, so that the variable effect is not executed. Thus, the player can avoid feeling bored and dissatisfied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when the variation effect is not executed due to the command abnormality, information indicating that may be displayed on the image display device 14, or when the variation effect is not executed, a dedicated background image is displayed. May be.

  In addition, when the variation effect is not executed due to a command abnormality, the size of the held icon and / or the changing icon is changed so as to be enlarged as compared with the normal size. The size of the held icon and / or the changing icon may be restored to the original size. In this way, the on-hold icon change notice can be emphasized, and the entertainment of the game is improved.

  Further, when the variation effect is not executed due to a command abnormality, the hold icon and / or the changing icon is moved from the lower part of the display unit 140 to the center or a position near the center, and then the variation effect is executed. In addition, the hold icon and / or the changing icon that have been moved and displayed may be returned to their original positions. In this way, the on-hold icon change notice can be emphasized, and the entertainment of the game is improved.

  In the first to third embodiments, the changing effect is not executed due to the occurrence of the command abnormality, but the changing display of the effect symbol is executed, and the advance notice is executed in response to the changing display of the effect symbol. Production (such as step-up notice, cut-in notice, serif notice, etc.) or reach production performed in the reach state may not be executed. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost due to the fact that the design symbol variation display is not executed even though there is a special figure hold, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. (It is possible to improve the interest of the game).

  Also, even if a variation effect is executed without being determined as a command abnormality, the execution mode of the continuous notice effect is different depending on whether the gaming state designation command is abnormal or not abnormal. For example, a unique continuous notice effect associated with (depends on) the gaming state and a common continuous notice effect not associated with (not dependent on) the game state are set and the gaming state is set. If there is no abnormality in the specified command and the variation effect is executed, a specific continuous notice effect corresponding to the gaming state at that time is executed, or it is executed with high probability, and there is an abnormality in the gaming state specification command, but the variation effect is When executed, a common continuous notice effect may be executed or executed with high probability.

  Note that, when the variation effect (the variation display of the effect symbol) is not executed due to the occurrence of the command abnormality, the image display device 14 does not execute the variation display of the effect symbol, but the image display device 14 has a special symbol (for example, a special symbol). You may make it carry out the variable display of what is called a 4th pattern) which carries out a variable display in synchronization with the variable display of a pattern. In this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to misunderstand the progress of the game.

  Further, the special symbol variation display may be executed by a dedicated display device (image display device, display device including one or a plurality of LEDs) provided at a position that can be visually recognized by the player. Moreover, it is preferable to stop the variation display by a special diagram variation stop designation command, regardless of whether the variation display of the effect symbol is performed or the variation display of the special symbol is performed when the command abnormality occurs.

  In addition, when a variation effect is not executed due to the occurrence of a command abnormality, a special effect that cannot be seen except for the occurrence of a command abnormality on the image display device 14 over that period, or a special effect that is rarely executed normally. An effect or the like may be executed. If it does in this way, even if a change production is not performed, it will become the player's feeling and it will become possible to improve the interest of a game.

  In addition, when the special symbol variation stop designation command is transmitted, the representation symbol designation command is transmitted again, and when the variation representation is not executed due to the occurrence of the command abnormality, the representation symbol that has been stopped and displayed over the period The special symbol may be switched to the symbol corresponding to the effect symbol designation command and displayed.

  In addition, games that can change the content of the production (frequency of appearance of fluctuation effects, notice effects, etc., expectation level of jackpots, etc.) according to the game history (points) that can be acquired as a result of the game, or can be customized by the player In the case of the machine Y, when a variation effect is not executed due to the occurrence of a command abnormality, a special game history (points) is given or a game history (points) more than usual is given. Good. If it does in this way, even if a change production is not performed, it will become the player's feeling and it will become possible to improve the interest of a game.

  In addition, when a variation effect (variable display of a special symbol) is performed, a game information output terminal using variation information indicating that the variation effect (variable display of a special symbol) is performed (start or stop) as an external signal Although the signal is output from the board 108, even if the variation effect corresponding to the hold icon is not executed due to the command abnormality, the fact that the variation effect (variable display of the special symbol) is performed (start or stop) The fluctuation information shown may be output from the game information output terminal board 108 as an external signal.

  By the way, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-083892), when a game ball enters the starting port while a special symbol is displayed, the determination information Is stored as reserved data, and before the special symbol determination based on the reserved data is performed based on the stored reserved data, the determination result of the special symbol determination performed based on the reserved data is “special game. It is determined whether or not it is “execute” (preliminary determination), and if the determination result of the preliminary determination is “execute special game”, the effect mode is changed from the normal normal effect mode to the stop of a specific special symbol. Although it is set to the specific production mode in which the degree of expectation that the display is performed is higher than the normal production mode, there is a possibility that the player may not notice that the display may be set to the specific production mode. There is a problem that that.

  As a configuration for solving the above-described problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, after the game medium (game ball or the like) passes through the start area (the first start port 6 or the second start port 7), Based on the establishment of the variable display start condition of the symbol (special symbol), the predetermined symbol display unit (special symbol display device) displays the symbol variation, stops the symbol variation display, and performs a specific display. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the game machine executes a special game (bonus game) advantageous to the player, and the determination information (special map determination information) is based on the fact that the game medium has passed the start area. And a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) for the variation display of the symbols for which the start condition of the variation display of the symbols has not yet been satisfied, although the game medium has passed the start area, In addition, the determination information acquisition hand The special game is stored on the basis of the hold memory stored in the hold storage means when the start condition for the variable display of the symbol is satisfied, and the hold storage means for storing the determination information acquired by Determining means for determining whether or not to execute, when the determination by the determining means is performed, effect control means for executing a notification effect (variation effect) for notifying the determination result, and notification by the effect control means An effect mode setting means capable of setting a specific effect mode (prefetch zone effect) having a higher expectation of executing the special game than an effect mode (for example, effect mode A) as the effect mode of the effect, and the effect When setting to the specific effect mode by the mode setting means, the sign effect suggesting the setting of the specific effect mode before being set to the specific effect mode Foreplay effect execution means for executing zone sign effect), and when the foreplay effect is executed, a foreplay effect execution notification indicating that the foreplay effect is being executed (display of an icon in a pre-read zone effect suggestion mode) A warning effect execution informing means for performing.

  By doing in this way, it can be suggested that the indication effect is performed and it can be made easy to notice that there is a possibility of being set to the specific effect mode.

  In addition, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-083892), when a game ball enters the start port while a special symbol is displayed, the determination information Is stored as reserved data, and before the special symbol determination based on the reserved data is performed based on the stored reserved data, the determination result of the special symbol determination performed based on the reserved data is “special game. It is determined whether or not it is “execute” (preliminary determination), and if the determination result of the preliminary determination is “execute special game”, the effect mode is changed from the normal normal effect mode to the stop of a specific special symbol. The specific display mode is set so that the expected level of display is higher than the normal display mode, but the player cannot recognize the expected level set in the specific display mode. There was.

  As a configuration for solving the above-described problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, after the game medium (game ball or the like) passes through the start area (the first start port 6 or the second start port 7), Based on the establishment of the variable display start condition of the symbol (special symbol), the predetermined symbol display unit (special symbol display device) displays the symbol variation, stops the symbol variation display, and performs a specific display. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the game machine executes a special game (bonus game) advantageous to the player, and the determination information (special map determination information) is based on the fact that the game medium has passed the start area. And a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) for the variation display of the symbols for which the start condition of the variation display of the symbols has not yet been satisfied, although the game medium has passed the start area, In addition, the determination information acquisition hand The special game is stored on the basis of the hold memory stored in the hold storage means when the start condition for the variable display of the symbol is satisfied, and the hold storage means for storing the determination information acquired by Determining means for determining whether or not to execute, when the determination by the determining means is performed, effect control means for executing a notification effect (variation effect) for notifying the determination result, and notification by the effect control means An effect mode setting means capable of setting a specific effect mode (prefetch zone effect) having a higher expectation of executing the special game than an effect mode (for example, effect mode A) as the effect mode of the effect, and the effect When setting to the specific effect mode by the mode setting means, the sign effect suggesting the setting of the specific effect mode before being set to the specific effect mode Foreplay effect execution means for executing zone sign effect), and when the foreplay effect is executed, a foreplay effect execution notification indicating that the foreplay effect is being executed (display of an icon in a pre-read zone effect suggestion mode) A warning effect execution notification means for performing the notification, and there are a plurality of notification modes of the warning effect execution notification, and the notification mode of the warning effect execution notification of the plurality of types has a degree of expectation that the specific effect mode is set. A first predictive effect execution notification mode (prefetch zone suggesting effect mode 1) indicating that the first expected level is a second expected level in which the expected level at which the specific effect mode is set is higher than the first expected level. A second precursor effect execution notification mode (prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 2) indicating that there is a certain event is included.

  By doing in this way, it becomes possible to make a player recognize the expectation degree set to specific production mode.

  In addition, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-083892), when a game ball enters the start port while a special symbol is displayed, the determination information Is stored as hold data, and when the hold data is stored, a hold image corresponding to the hold data is displayed in a predetermined area of the image display device. In addition, based on the stored hold data, before the special symbol determination based on the hold data is performed, the determination result of the special symbol determination performed based on the hold data is “execute special game”. Whether the special game is executed by changing the display mode of the hold image to a special display mode different from the normal display mode based on the determination result of the preliminary determination. The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is based on the judgment result of the pre-judgment for the variation effect performed corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol. The high specific effect mode may be set, but the expectation degree set in the specific effect mode by the specific effect effect mode indicating the expectation degree that the special game such as the display of the hold image will be executed. Because 唆又 is not informed, the player has a problem that it is impossible to recognize the degree of expectation to be set to a specific effect mode by directing aspects of a particular effect.

  As a configuration for solving the above-described problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, after the game medium (game ball or the like) passes through the start area (the first start port 6 or the second start port 7), Based on the establishment of the variable display start condition of the symbol (special symbol), the predetermined symbol display unit (special symbol display device) displays the symbol variation, stops the symbol variation display, and performs a specific display. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the game machine executes a special game (bonus game) advantageous to the player, and the determination information (special map determination information) is based on the fact that the game medium has passed the start area. And a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) for the variation display of the symbols for which the start condition of the variation display of the symbols has not yet been satisfied, although the game medium has passed the start area, In addition, the determination information acquisition hand The special game is stored on the basis of the hold memory stored in the hold storage means when the start condition for the variable display of the symbol is satisfied, and the hold storage means for storing the determination information acquired by Determining means for determining whether or not to execute, when the determination by the determining means is performed, effect control means for executing a notification effect (variation effect) for notifying the determination result, and notification by the effect control means Production mode setting means capable of setting a specific production mode (prefetch zone production) that has a higher expectation of executing the special game than the normal production mode (eg, production mode A) Specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect (display of an icon) indicating the predetermined item, and the specific effect is a degree of expectation for executing the special game A first specific effect indicated, the specific effect mode is adapted to a second specific effect indicating the expectation of being set.

  By doing in this way, it becomes possible to recognize the expectation degree set to specific production mode by the production mode of specific production.

  In addition, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in JP2013-252284A), a first control command including gaming state data and a second control including variation pattern information capable of specifying gaming state data Judgment of abnormality of consistency with the command is made, and in the case of inconsistency, the variable display is displayed, but the special symbol combination different from the symbol at the time of matching is stopped, but in fact, the jackpot symbol combination stop display Even if the game state data of the two commands are inconsistent, the special symbol combination will be stopped and displayed, so that the player may misunderstand that the result of the variable display is lost. There's a problem.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 101) for controlling the progress of the game in any of a plurality of types of gaming states, the main control board 101 Subordinate control means (effect control board 102, lamp control board 104, image control board 105) for controlling the effect of the game based on a command from the control means, and establishment of the start condition (first start port 6 or second Based on the fact that a game ball enters the starting port 7), a variation display of the identification information (special symbol) is executed, and if the variation display of the identification information becomes a special result (special bonus symbol), a special game advantageous to the player In a gaming machine capable of generating a state (a jackpot game), the main control means, based on the start of the variation display of the identification information, a stop result designation command that can specify a stop result of the variation display of the identification information (effect design) A change result designation command transmission means for transmitting a change command), and a variation pattern designation command capable of specifying a variation pattern of the variation display of the identification information based on the start of variation display of the identification information (special pattern variation pattern designation command) And a gaming state designation command for transmitting a gaming state designation command capable of specifying a gaming state when the variation display of the identification information is executed based on the start of the variation display of the identification information. Command transmission means, and the slave control means determines whether the stop result designation command, the variation pattern designation command, and the gaming state designation command transmitted from the main control means have been normally received. Command determination means, the stop result designation command received from the main control means, and the variation pattern designation A variation effect executing means for executing a change effect (such as a change display of effect symbols) for producing a change display of the identification information based on the command and the gaming state designation command, the change effect executing means, Even if it is determined that the gaming state designation command has not been received normally, if it is determined that the stop result designation command and the variation pattern designation command have been successfully received, the variation effect is executed. Even if it is determined that the gaming state designation command has been normally received, if it is determined that the stop result designation command or the variation pattern designation command has not been normally received, the variation effect is displayed. Do not run.

  By doing in this way, it can make it hard to make a player misidentify the result of a variable display, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of a game.

  In addition, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in JP2013-252284A), in order to produce a variable display based on a command transmitted from the main control unit to the sub control unit at the start of the variable display. However, when there is an abnormality in the command transmitted from the main control means, the variation effect is not executed. However, there is a problem that when the variation effect is not executed due to an abnormality in the command transmitted from the main control means, the game becomes monotonous and the interest of the game is lowered.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board 101) for controlling the progress of the game and the game based on the command from the main control means. Subordinate control means (production control board 102, lamp control board 104, image control board 105, etc.) for controlling the production, and the first start condition is satisfied (the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 has a game ball) The first identification information (special symbol) based on the change display, and when the first identification information variation display is a special result (a jackpot special symbol), a special gaming state ( A jackpot game) can be generated, and based on the establishment of the second start condition (the game ball passes the winning gate 10), the variable display of the second identification information (ordinary symbol) is executed, and the second identification information Fluctuation display is a specific result In a gaming machine capable of generating an auxiliary gaming state (auxiliary game) that is advantageous to the player in the case of the symbol), the main control means displays the variation display of the first identification information based on the start of the variation display of the first identification information. A first start command transmission means for transmitting a first start command (game state designation command, effect symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command, etc.) capable of specifying the execution information, and the variation of the second identification information Second start time command transmission means for transmitting a second start time command (ordinary effect design designation command, common figure variation pattern designation command, etc.) capable of specifying execution information of variation display of the second identification information based on the start of display. The slave control means includes a command determination means for determining whether or not the first start command transmitted from the main control means has been normally received; Based on the first start command received from the control means, a fluctuating effect execution means for executing a fluctuating effect (such as a fluctuating display of effect symbols) for producing a fluctuating display of the first identification information; and the first identification Based on the suggestion effect execution means for executing the suggestion effect (roulette effect) that suggests the degree of expectation that the special gaming state will occur during the fluctuation display of information, and the second start time command received from the main control means, Notification effect execution means for executing a notification effect (roulette effect) for notifying that an auxiliary gaming state occurs, and the variation effect execution means normally receives the first start time command by the command determination means. When it is determined that the variation effect is not performed, the variation effect is not executed, and the suggestion effect execution unit is configured to display the change during the change display of the first identification information. When the effect is not executed, the suggestion effect is not executed during the variation display of the first identification information, and the notification effect execution means is not executed during the variation display of the first identification information. Even so, the notification effect is executed during the variable display of the first identification information.

  By doing in this way, it can suppress that a game becomes monotonous and can improve the interest of a game.

  ◇ In addition, in recent gaming machines, determination information is acquired based on the passage of a game ball to the start area and stored as a reserved memory for executing a variable display, and the reserved memory is determined before the start of the variable display Some pre-read effects are executed over one or more variable effects based on the results. However, when a pre-read effect is executed on a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in JP2013-252284A), the pre-read effect is performed. There is a case where the fluctuating effect is not executed during the execution of the effect. In such a case, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand the progress of the game.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board 101) for controlling the progress of the game and the game based on the command from the main control means. Subordinate control means for controlling the production (production control board 102, lamp control board 104, image control board 105, etc.), and the start condition is satisfied (the game ball enters the first start port 6 or the second start port 7). The identification information (special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner based on the ball), and a special gaming state (bonus game) advantageous to the player can be generated when the variation display of the identification information results in a special result (a jackpot special symbol). In such a gaming machine, the main control means obtains determination information based on the establishment of the start condition, and stores the determination information as a hold storage for executing a variable display of the identification information, and the determination information. A start time processing means for performing a process of determining at the start of variation display of other information and transmitting a start command (game state designation command, effect symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command, etc.) according to the result of the decision And pre-start processing means for performing a process of determining the determination information before the start of variable display of the identification information and transmitting a pre-start command (start opening prize designation command) according to the determination result. The slave control means is based on command start means for determining whether or not the start time command transmitted from the main control means has been normally received, and the start time command received from the main control means. The variation effect execution means for executing the variation effect (effect display variation display etc.) for effecting the variation display of the identification information, and the pre-start command received from the main control means And a pre-reading effect executing means for executing a predetermined pre-reading effect (continuous notice effect and / or hold icon change notice) over the variation display of one or a plurality of the identification information. If the determination means determines that the start command has not been received normally, it can be controlled not to execute the variation effect, and the prefetch effect execution means is the execution target of the predetermined prefetch effect. When the variation effect is not executed during the variation display of the identification information, the predetermined pre-reading effect can be controlled not to be performed during the variation display of the identification information.

  By doing in this way, it can make it difficult to misunderstand progress of a game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of a game.

  ◇ In addition, in recent gaming machines, determination information is acquired based on the passage of a game ball to the start area and stored as a reserved memory for executing a variable display, and the reserved memory is determined before the start of the variable display Some pre-read effects are executed over one or more variable effects based on the results. However, when a pre-read effect is executed on a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in JP2013-252284A), the pre-read effect is performed. There is a case where the fluctuating effect is not executed during the execution of the effect. In such a case, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand the progress of the game.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board 101) for controlling the progress of the game and the game based on the command from the main control means. Subordinate control means for controlling the production (production control board 102, lamp control board 104, image control board 105, etc.), and the start condition is satisfied (the game ball enters the first start port 6 or the second start port 7). The identification information (special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner based on the ball), and a special gaming state (bonus game) advantageous to the player can be generated when the variation display of the identification information results in a special result (a jackpot special symbol). In such a gaming machine, the main control means obtains determination information based on the establishment of the start condition, and stores the determination information as a hold storage for executing a variable display of the identification information, and the determination information. A start time processing means for performing a process of determining at the start of variation display of other information and transmitting a start command (game state designation command, effect symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command, etc.) according to the result of the decision And pre-start processing means for performing a process of determining the determination information before the start of variable display of the identification information and transmitting a pre-start command (start opening prize designation command) according to the determination result. The slave control means is based on command start means for determining whether or not the start time command transmitted from the main control means has been normally received, and the start time command received from the main control means. The variation effect execution means for executing the variation effect (effect display variation display etc.) for effecting the variation display of the identification information, and the pre-start command received from the main control means And a pre-reading effect executing means for executing a predetermined pre-reading effect (continuous notice effect and / or hold icon change notice) over the variation display of one or a plurality of the identification information. The determination means is configured not to execute the fluctuating effect when it is determined that the start command has not been received normally, and the prefetch effect execution means is the identification subject to execution of the predetermined prefetch effect. Even when the variation effect is not executed during the variation display of the information, the predetermined pre-reading effect is performed during the variation display of the identification information.

  By doing in this way, it can make it difficult to misunderstand progress of a game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of a game.

  ◇ In addition, in recent gaming machines, determination information is acquired based on the passage of a game ball to the start area and stored as a reserved memory for executing a variable display, and the reserved memory is determined before the start of the variable display Some pre-read effects are executed over one or more variable effects based on the results. However, when a pre-read effect is executed on a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in JP2013-252284A), the pre-read effect is performed. There is a case where the fluctuating effect is not executed during the execution of the effect. In such a case, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand the progress of the game.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board 101) for controlling the progress of the game and the game based on the command from the main control means. Subordinate control means for controlling the production (production control board 102, lamp control board 104, image control board 105, etc.), and the start condition is satisfied (the game ball enters the first start port 6 or the second start port 7). The identification information (special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner based on the ball), and a special gaming state (bonus game) advantageous to the player can be generated when the variation display of the identification information results in a special result (a jackpot special symbol). In such a gaming machine, the main control means obtains determination information based on the establishment of the start condition and stores it as a hold storage for executing a change display of the identification information, and the hold storage means The memorized determination information is determined at the start of the variation display of the identification information, and a start time command (game state designation command, effect symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command, etc.) according to the result of the decision is transmitted. A start time processing means for performing processing and determination information stored in the hold storage means are determined before the start of variable display of the identification information, and a pre-start command (start opening prize designation command) according to the result of the determination Pre-start processing means for performing a process of transmitting the command, wherein the sub-control means determines whether or not the start-time command transmitted from the main control means has been normally received, and Fluctuation effect executing means for executing a change effect (such as a change display of effect symbols) for effecting a change display of the identification information based on the start command received from the main control means; Based on the pre-start command received from the main control means, prefetch effect execution means for executing a prefetch effect (continuous notice effect, hold icon change notice) over a variable display of one or more of the identification information; and the storage means Hold display means for performing a hold display according to the stored number of stored determination information, and the prefetch effect is a first prefetch effect (continuous notice effect) executed in the variation effect, and the hold display A second pre-reading effect (holding icon change notice) executed by changing the display mode, and the variation effect executing means determines that the command determining means has not received the start command normally. In such a case, the change effect is not executed, and the prefetch effect execution means includes the identification information to be executed by the first prefetch effect. When the variation effect is not executed during the variable display, the first prefetch effect is not executed during the variation display of the identification information, and the variation information of the identification information that is the execution target of the second prefetch effect is displayed. Even when the variation effect is not executed, the second prefetch effect is executed during the variation display of the identification information.

  By doing in this way, it can make it difficult to misunderstand progress of a game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of a game.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine such as the gaming machine Y, and can also be used for a jigball game machine and an arrangement ball gaming machine.

Y gaming machine 6 first start opening 6a first start opening detection sensor 7 second start opening 7a second start opening detection sensor 8 large winning opening 10 winning gate 14 image display device 15 audio output device 16 effect lighting device 70 second Start opening control device 80 Large winning opening control device 101 Main control board 101a Main CPU
101b Main ROM
101c Main RAM
102 Production control board 102a Sub CPU
102b Sub ROM
102c Sub RAM
140 Display unit 141 First hold icon display area 142 Fluctuating icon display area 143 Second hold icon display area

Claims (1)

Main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and sub control means for controlling the effect of the game based on the command from the main control means,
In a gaming machine capable of executing a variation display of identification information based on the establishment of the start condition and generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the variation display of the identification information becomes a special result,
The main control means includes
Hold storage means for acquiring determination information based on the establishment of the start condition and storing it as a hold storage for executing variation display of the identification information;
Determination processing stored in the hold storage device is determined at the start of the variation display of the identification information, and a start time processing device for performing a process of transmitting a start command according to the determination result;
Pre-start processing means for determining the determination information stored in the hold storage means before the start of variable display of the identification information, and performing a process of transmitting a pre-start command according to the determination result,
The slave control means includes
Command determining means for determining whether or not the start time command transmitted from the main control means has been successfully received;
Based on the start command received from the main control means, a fluctuation effect execution means for executing a fluctuation effect for effecting a change display of the identification information;
Based on the pre-start command received from the main control means, prefetch effect execution means for executing a prefetch effect over a variable display of one or a plurality of the identification information;
Hold display means for performing a hold display according to the number of determination information stored in the storage means,
The prefetching effect includes a first prefetching effect executed in the variation effect and a second prefetching effect executed by changing a display mode of the hold display,
The variation production execution means
If the command determination means determines that the start command has not been received normally, it is configured not to execute the variation effect,
The prefetching effect execution means includes
When the variation effect is not executed during the variation display of the identification information to be executed of the first prefetch effect, the first prefetch effect is not performed during the variation display of the identification information,
The second pre-reading effect is executed during the variation display of the identification information even when the variation effect is not performed during the variation display of the identification information that is the execution target of the second pre-reading effect. To play.